616499

Citroen C4 - 2010 Manual

280
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/284
Next page
4
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
E X T E R I O R
Directional headlamps
This lighting function automatically
improves forward vision when cor-
nering.
Lane departure warning
system
Above 50 mph, this system is acti-
vated automatically if you inadvert-
ently wander from your lane.
Front/rear parking sensors
This system warns you if an obsta-
cle is detected when manoeuvring
the vehicle.
Guide-me-home lighting
The headlamps stay on for a short
period after switching off the ignition.
74
73
121
Vehicle maintenance
When washing your vehicle with a
high-pressure jet, keep the end of
the lance at least 30 centimetres
from any fi lm fi nishers.
Temporary tyre repair kit
This kit is a complete system, com-
prised of a compressor and a sealant
product, to carry out a temporary tyre
repair.
120
136
5
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
A C C E S S
Remote control
A. Unfolding/folding the key.
B. Unlocking the vehicle.
C. Locking the vehicle.
56, 57
A long press on button C locks the
vehicle and closes the windows.
Two successive presses on button C
deadlocks the vehicle.
Press once to lock the vehicle.
Press again to unlock the vehicle.
65
Manual central locking
D.
Activating/deactivating guide-me-home
lighting.
A heavy object (key fob...), attached to
the key and weighing down on its shaft
in the ignition switch, could cause a
malfunction.
6
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
A C C E S S
Unlock the vehicle with the remote
control or the key.
Press up on the handle and lift the
tailgate.
Tailgate Spare wheel
Access to the spare wheel
Lift the carpet, then remove the tool
holder to gain access to the wheel.
133
Locking filler cap
Turn the key a quarter turn to lock
and unlock the fi ller cap.
When refuelling, place the cap on the
carrier on the inside face of the fi ller
fl ap.
68 67
B. Removing the fi ller cap.
Fuel tank capacity: approximately
60 litres.
A. Opening the fuel fi ller fl ap.
To open the fuel fi ller fl ap, pull at its
notched edge. There is a fuel label on
the inside of the fl ap.
Fuel tank
7
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
I N T E R I O R
Translucent instrument panel
This system gives optimum contrast,
whatever the ambient light level.
Cruise control/Speed limiter
These two systems allow the vehicle’s
speed to be maintained at a programmed
level.
Scented air freshener
The air freshener distributes scented
air throughout the cabin. It is located
in the centre air vent
Audio and communication
systems
These systems make use of the lat-
est technologies: Audio system, USB
port, Bluetooth
®
telephone, NaviDrive
MyWay
23
116, 118
48
171
8
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D A S H B O A R D
1. Controls:
- Mirrors.
- Windows.
- Child safety
2. Headlamp adjustment.
3. Control switches:
- ESP.
- Parking sensors.
- Lane departure warning system.
- Anti-intrusion alarm.
4. Steering lock and ignition switch.
5. Control stalk:
- Windscreen wiper.
- Screen wash.
- Rear screen wiper.
- Trip computer.
6. Fixed centred controls.
7. Direction indicator warning lamps.
8. Speedometer
9. Controls:
- Trip mileage recorder reset
button.
- Display lighting rheostat.
- Display of alerts and status of
functions.
10. Centre air vents.
11. Driver’s airbag.
12. Horn
13. Gear lever.
14. Parking brake.
9
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D A S H B O A R D
1. Bonnet release.
2. Fusebox cover.
3. Storage drawer (left and right).
4. Lateral air vent (left and right).
5. Side window demister vent
(left and right).
6. Loudspeaker (Tweeter)
(left and right).
7. Passenger’s airbag.
8. Control for central locking of doors
and boot.
9. Multifunction screen.
10. Hazard warning lamps control.
11. Scented air freshener.
12. Controls:
- Lighting.
- Direction indicators.
- Front foglamps
- Rear foglamps.
13. Steering column adjustment lever.
14. Radio-CD or NaviDrive radio
navigation.
15. Air conditioning or heating/
ventilation.
16. Cigar lighter.
17. 12-volt accessory socket
(120 W max). or USB port.
18. Ashtray.
19. Key-operated switch:
- Passenger’s airbag activation/
deactivation.
20. Lower glovebox.
- Handbook pack storage.
10
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D A S H B O A R D
Controls for speed limiter
and cruise control
Audio system
controls
Warning lamps:
lighting and
direction
indicators
Function controls:
- Display lighting rheostat
- Voice recognition
- Air recirculation
- Telephone
- Personal button
Multifunction screen
controls
Horn
F I X E D C E N T R E D C O N T R O L S S T E E R I N G W H E E L
11
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D A S H B O A R D
Controls for speed limiter and
cruise control
Audio system controls
See "Audio and Telematics"
Selection of speed
limiter or cruise
control
Activation of speed
limiter and Deactivation/
Reactivation of cruise
control and speed limiter
Search for higher
radio frequencies
Scroll through
memorised stations
Decrease
speed/Activate
cruise control
Increase
speed/Activate
cruise control
Increase sound
volume
Reduce
sound
volume
Mute
12
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D A S H B O A R D
Display
lighting
rheostat
Start voice
recognition
(See "Audio and
Telematics")
Access to
"Main menu" *
Telephone
pick-up/hang-up
(See "Audio and
Telematics")
Personal button:
- Black panel (default function),
or
- Interior lamp on/off, or
- Log of alerts, or
- Status of functions
Give a long press on this button to
display the personalisation menu.
Air recirculation
Display the
"Directory" menu
(See "Audio and
Telematics")
* In compliance with national legislation, in some countries the "menu" control is deactivated when driving.
Confi rmation of the function
selected or the value modifi ed
Pick up/hang up
(See "Audio and Telematics")
Scroll in the
multifunction
screen
Selection of the type of in-
formation displayed on the
right of the screen (radio,
trip computer, navigation/
guidance…) and for screen
A, choice of activation/deac-
tivation of your functions and
choice of your adjustments
Cancel the current opera-
tion or return to the previ-
ous screen
13
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
S I T T I N G C O M F O R T A B L Y
Front seats
Manual adjustments
Forwards-backwards Driver’s seat cushion height and angle
adjustment
Seat back angle and lumbar adjustment
49
Electrically operated adjustments (driver’s seat only)
Forwards-backwards
Seat cushion height and angle adjustment
Seat back angle and lumbar adjustment
50
14
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
S I T T I N G C O M F O R T A B L Y
Adjustment of front head restraints
Height and angle.
49
Adjustment of rear head restraints
A. Low position.
B. High position.
52
1. Unlock the steering column using
the lever.
2. Adjust the position of the steering
wheel for height and reach.
3. Lock the steering column with the
lever.
Manual adjustment of steering
wheel height and reach
55
Front seat belt
1. Fastening.
A. Height adjustment (5-door).
B. Stowing the seat belt (3-door).
99
15
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
Electric windows
64
1. Driver’s window control.
2. Passenger’s window control.
3. Left-hand rear window control.
4. Right-hand rear window control.
5. Deactivation of opening of rear elec-
tric windows
and *
Deactivation of opening of rear
doors (electric child lock).
* Depending on version.
S I T T I N G C O M F O R T A B L Y
Adjustment of door mirrors
A. Select the mirror.
B. Adjust the mirror.
C. Fold-back/Unfolding.
54
Adjustment of rear view mirror
Manual model
1. Adjust the mirror.
2. Select the mirror’s "day" position.
Automatic day/night model
1. Automatic detection of day/night
mode.
2. Adjust the mirror.
55
16
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
Lighting
Ring A
Ring B
Screen wipe
Rear screen wipe
Front and rear foglamps.
70
75
75
Lighting off.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Sidelamps.
Dipped or main beam.
Windscreen wipe
2 Fast speed.
1 Normal speed.
I Intermittent.
0 Off.
AUTO Automatic rain sesnitive wipers
or single wipe.
Off.
Intermittent.
Timed wipe and wash.
The automatic rain sensitive wipers
must be reactivated each time the ve-
hicle is started.
Deactivation of automatic rain sensi-
tive wipers
Go to position I then return to posi-
tion 0 .
"Motorway" function
Move the stalk briefl y upwards or down-
wards, without going beyond the point
of resistance; the corresponding direc-
tion indicators will fl ash 3 times.
This function is available regardless of
the vehicle’s speed, but is especially
useful for changing lanes at higher
speeds.
95
–
17
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
V E N T I L A T I O N
To obtain the best from the system, we advise:
- Heating/Manual air conditioning
For effective use of the system, we recommend:
- Digital air conditioning
With digital air conditioning, use of the AUTO function is recommended.
I would like...
Manual Air Conditioning
Air distribution Air fl ow
Air recirculation/
Fresh air intake
Temperature A/C
HEATING
COOLING
DEMISTING
DEFROSTING
18
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
M O N I T O R I N G
Instrument panel with translucent screen
A. Speedometer.
B. Rev counter.
C. Fuel gauge.
D. Lighting rheostat.
E. Warning lamps.
Control switches
Ignition on, the orange and red alert
warning lamps come on.
With the engine running, these same
warning lamps should go out.
If a warning lamp stays on, refer to the
relevant page.
Warning lamps
23
24
A. Deactivation of the ESP/ASR system.
98
B. Deactivation of the visual and audi-
ble parking sensors.
122
C. Deactivation of the lane departure
warning system.
120
D. Deactivation of the alarm volumetric
sensors.
61
19
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
P A S S E N G E R S A F E T Y
Activation/Deactivation of the
front passenger’s airbag
Child lock
A. Insert the ignition key.
B. Select the "ON" or "OFF" position.
C. Remove the key.
A. Manual control.
B. Electric control*.
103
94
Warnings for seat belts
unfastened/not fastened
Driver
Front passenger.
Left rear passenger.
Centre rear passenger.
Right rear passenger.
27
* Depending on version.
20
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D R I V I N G
Ignition switch
S: Steering lock
To free the steering, turn the steer-
ing wheel slightly at the same time
as turning the key, avoiding any un-
due force.
M: Ignition
D: Starter
Release the key as soon as the en-
gine has started. Never turn to this
position when the engine is running.
1. Selecting/stopping the cruise con-
trol mode.
2. Setting a cruising speed/Reducing
the value memorised.
3. Stopping/Resuming cruise control.
4. Setting a cruising speed/Increasing
the value memorised.
Cruise control
118
To be memorised or activated, the speed
of the vehicle must be above 25 mph
(40 km/h), with fourth or higher gear se-
lected on a manual gearbox (second in
the case of 6-speed electronic gearbox
system or automatic gearbox).
Speed limiter
1. Selecting/Stopping the speed limiter
mode.
2. Reducing the value memorised.
3. Starting/Stopping speed limitation.
4. Increasing the value memorised.
116
21
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D R I V I N G
6-speed Electronic Gearbox
System
Neutral
Do not select this position, even
momentarily, when the vehicle is
moving.
Automatic mode
Sport setting
Reverse
Using the lever
Push the lever forwards to change
up.
Pull the lever backwards to change
down.
Using the control paddles behind the
steering wheel
Press the " + " or " - " control paddle be-
hind the steering wheel for an immediate
gear change up or down respectively.
Under heavy acceleration, the gear-
box will only change up if the driver
operates the gear lever or the control
paddles at the steering wheel.
107
Manual mode
Or
The gearbox operates in auto-active
mode without input on your part.
22
F A M I L I A R I S A T I O N
D R I V I N G
To aid starting on a gradient, your vehi-
cle is equipped with a system that tem-
porarily holds the vehicle stationary.
On a falling gradient, with the vehicle
stationary and reverse gear engaged
(position R ), the vehicle is held momen-
tarily after releasing the brake pedal.
On a rising gradient, with the vehicle
stationary and forward gear engaged
(position A or M ), the vehicle is held
momentarily after releasing the brake
pedal.
Hill Start Assist (with 6-speed
Electronic Gearbox System)
112
23
I
M O N I T O R I N G
INSTRUMENT PANEL WITH TRANSLUCENT SCREEN
The instrument panel groups all the driving and comfort information at the centre of the dashboard.
Central screen
5. Trip mileage recorder
6. Fuel gauge
7. Engine oil level check
8. Coolant temperature
Control buttons
1. Rev counter
2. Cruise control or speed limiter
setting
3. Speedometer
4. Service indicator when the ig-
nition is switched on, then total
mileage recorder
A. Trip mileage recorder reset
B. Lighting rheostat
C. Display of alerts and Status of
functions
24
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on
The warning lamps come on for a
few seconds when the vehicle's igni-
tion is switched on.
When the engine is started, these
warning lamps should switch off.
If they remain on, before moving off,
consult information on the warning
lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The switching on of certain warning
lamps may be accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen.
The warning lamps may come on
continuously or fl ash.
Certain warning lamps may come
on in two different modes. Only by
relating the type of lighting to the
operation of the vehicle can it be
ascertained whether the situation
is normal or whether a fault has oc-
curred.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator
lamps comes on, this confi rms that
the corresponding system has come
into operation.
Front foglamps.
Left-hand direction
indicator.
Sidelamps.
Main beam headlamps.
Dipped beam headlamps.
Right-hand direction
indicator.
Rear foglamp.
Visual indicators informing the driver
that a system is in operation (opera-
tion or deactivation indicator lamps) or
of the occurrence of a fault (warning
lamp).
25
I
M O N I T O R I N G
"Foot on brake"
The fl ashing of this warning
lamp on the display informs
you that you need to press
the brake pedal in order to
be able to start the engine on a ve-
hicle with the (6-speed) Electronic
Gearbox System, or to move out of
position P in the case of an automatic
gearbox.
It may also fl ash to prompt you to
brake when engaging reverse gear.
In the case of the Electronic Gearbox
System, this warning lamp fl ashes to
indicate overheating of the clutch if
you use the accelerator excessively
to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope.
Use the brake pedal instead.
Electric child lock
If lit, the child lock is activa ted.
This warning lamp is displayed
a few seconds after the func-
tion is activated.
Deactivation warning lamps
If one of the following warning lamps
comes on, this confi rms that the
corresponding system has been
switched off intentionally.
Passenger's airbag system
deactivation
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
A specifi c button, located on the
dashboard, permits deactivation of
the system. This is confi rmed by
continuous lighting of this warning
lamp and of the indicator lamp on
the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h),
the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lamps Diesel engine pre-heating
Wait until this has gone out
before operating the starter.
When the engine is running or the
vehicle is moving, the lighting of
one of the following warning lamps
indicates the occurrence of a fault
requiring action on the part of the
driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of
a warning lamp must be investigated
further by reading the associated mes-
sage on the multifunction screen.
Should you encounter any problems,
do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN
dealer.
The passenger's airbag sys-
tem is put into service auto-
matically when the vehicle is
started.
A control switch, located in the glove
box, permits deactivation of the sys-
tem. This is confi rmed by continuous
lighting of this warning lamp on the
instrument panel or a message on
the NaviDrive multifunction screen.
26
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Maximum coolant temperature
If this comes on, it indicates
that the temperature in the
cooling system is too high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
Low fuel level
When the tank is full, all the
bars are lit.
If the fuel low warning lamp
comes on accompanied by
an audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen, there are
approximately 7 litres of fuel remain-
ing in the tank and the 2 or 3 bars
fl ash on the instrument panel.
When the last bar goes out, there
are approximately 2 litres of fuel re-
maining in the tank.
Lighting is associated
with the lighting of an-
other warning lamp:
Service
If this comes on, it indi-
cates the occurrence of
a problem in one of the
systems which does
not have a specifi c
warning lamp.
It is accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
The warning lamp comes on tempo-
rarily in the case of minor faults.
In the case of major faults, the warning
lamp remains on until the operating
fault is rectifi ed. Contact a CITROËN
dealer as soon as possible.
Braking
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
one of the braking systems:
- signifi cant drop in the fl uid level
in the circuit,
- electronic brake force distribu-
tion (EBFD) faulty (simultane-
ous lighting of the ABS warning
lamp),
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer.
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR).
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
Unless the system has been
deactivated, if this warning lamp
and the indicator lamp on the button
come on continuously, this indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the ESP/
ASR system or in the hill start assist
system.
Engine autodiagnostics system
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
the engine management
system.
If it fl ashes, it indicates the occur-
rence of a fault in the emission control
system.
Central alert
- punctured wheel,
- braking,
- coolant temperature,
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
the anti-lock braking system.
However, this does not pre-
vent operation of the vehicle's servo-
assisted braking system.
27
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Airbags
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
one of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems.
Door open
A door, the boot or the bonnet
is open:
- if the speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp
comes on continuously.
-
if the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp comes
on continuously, accompanied by
an audible signal.
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened
Driver's seat belt not fas-
tened:
- The warning lamp comes on if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched on
and between 0 and 12 mph (ap-
prox. 20 km/h).
- Above 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h),
the warning lamp fl ashes for ap-
proximately 120 seconds, accom-
panied by an audible signal. It
then remains on.
Front passenger and rear passenger
seat belts not fastened:
- When the ignition is switched on,
the warning lamp always comes
on if the passenger's seat belt is
not fastened.
It goes off when the engine is running,
doors closed and after 30 seconds.
- If a seat belt is unfastened, the
warning lamp comes on between
0 and 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph).
- Above 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph),
the warning lamp fl ashes for
approximately 120 seconds, ac-
companied by an audible signal.
Service indicator
System which informs the driver
when the next service is due, in ac-
cordance with the manufacturer's
servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is
due is calculated from the last indi-
cator zero reset. It is determined by
two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
24
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Indicator and warning lamps
When the ignition is switched on
The warning lamps come on for a
few seconds when the vehicle's igni-
tion is switched on.
When the engine is started, these
warning lamps should switch off.
If they remain on, before moving off,
consult information on the warning
lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The switching on of certain warning
lamps may be accompanied by an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen.
The warning lamps may come on
continuously or fl ash.
Certain warning lamps may come
on in two different modes. Only by
relating the type of lighting to the
operation of the vehicle can it be
ascertained whether the situation
is normal or whether a fault has oc-
curred.
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator
lamps comes on, this confi rms that
the corresponding system has come
into operation.
Front foglamps.
Left-hand direction
indicator.
Sidelamps.
Main beam headlamps.
Dipped beam headlamps.
Right-hand direction
indicator.
Rear foglamp.
Visual indicators informing the driver
that a system is in operation (opera-
tion or deactivation indicator lamps) or
of the occurrence of a fault (warning
lamp).
25
I
M O N I T O R I N G
"Foot on brake"
The fl ashing of this warning
lamp on the display informs
you that you need to press
the brake pedal in order to
be able to start the engine on a ve-
hicle with the (6-speed) Electronic
Gearbox System, or to move out of
position P in the case of an automatic
gearbox.
It may also fl ash to prompt you to
brake when engaging reverse gear.
In the case of the Electronic Gearbox
System, this warning lamp fl ashes to
indicate overheating of the clutch if
you use the accelerator excessively
to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope.
Use the brake pedal instead.
Electric child lock
If lit, the child lock is activa ted.
This warning lamp is displayed
a few seconds after the func-
tion is activated.
Deactivation warning lamps
If one of the following warning lamps
comes on, this confi rms that the
corresponding system has been
switched off intentionally.
Passenger's airbag system
deactivation
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
A specifi c button, located on the
dashboard, permits deactivation of
the system. This is confi rmed by
continuous lighting of this warning
lamp and of the indicator lamp on
the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h),
the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lamps Diesel engine pre-heating
Wait until this has gone out
before operating the starter.
When the engine is running or the
vehicle is moving, the lighting of
one of the following warning lamps
indicates the occurrence of a fault
requiring action on the part of the
driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of
a warning lamp must be investigated
further by reading the associated mes-
sage on the multifunction screen.
Should you encounter any problems,
do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN
dealer.
The passenger's airbag sys-
tem is put into service auto-
matically when the vehicle is
started.
A control switch, located in the glove
box, permits deactivation of the sys-
tem. This is confi rmed by continuous
lighting of this warning lamp on the
instrument panel or a message on
the NaviDrive multifunction screen.
25
I
M O N I T O R I N G
"Foot on brake"
The fl ashing of this warning
lamp on the display informs
you that you need to press
the brake pedal in order to
be able to start the engine on a ve-
hicle with the (6-speed) Electronic
Gearbox System, or to move out of
position P in the case of an automatic
gearbox.
It may also fl ash to prompt you to
brake when engaging reverse gear.
In the case of the Electronic Gearbox
System, this warning lamp fl ashes to
indicate overheating of the clutch if
you use the accelerator excessively
to hold the vehicle on an uphill slope.
Use the brake pedal instead.
Electric child lock
If lit, the child lock is activa ted.
This warning lamp is displayed
a few seconds after the func-
tion is activated.
Deactivation warning lamps
If one of the following warning lamps
comes on, this confi rms that the
corresponding system has been
switched off intentionally.
Passenger's airbag system
deactivation
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR) deactivation
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
A specifi c button, located on the
dashboard, permits deactivation of
the system. This is confi rmed by
continuous lighting of this warning
lamp and of the indicator lamp on
the button.
From approximately 30 mph (50 km/h),
the system is reactivated automatically.
Warning lamps Diesel engine pre-heating
Wait until this has gone out
before operating the starter.
When the engine is running or the
vehicle is moving, the lighting of
one of the following warning lamps
indicates the occurrence of a fault
requiring action on the part of the
driver.
Any fault resulting in the displaying of
a warning lamp must be investigated
further by reading the associated mes-
sage on the multifunction screen.
Should you encounter any problems,
do not hesitate to contact a CITROËN
dealer.
The passenger's airbag sys-
tem is put into service auto-
matically when the vehicle is
started.
A control switch, located in the glove
box, permits deactivation of the sys-
tem. This is confi rmed by continuous
lighting of this warning lamp on the
instrument panel or a message on
the NaviDrive multifunction screen.
26
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Maximum coolant temperature
If this comes on, it indicates
that the temperature in the
cooling system is too high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
Low fuel level
When the tank is full, all the
bars are lit.
If the fuel low warning lamp
comes on accompanied by
an audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen, there are
approximately 7 litres of fuel remain-
ing in the tank and the 2 or 3 bars
fl ash on the instrument panel.
When the last bar goes out, there
are approximately 2 litres of fuel re-
maining in the tank.
Lighting is associated
with the lighting of an-
other warning lamp:
Service
If this comes on, it indi-
cates the occurrence of
a problem in one of the
systems which does
not have a specifi c
warning lamp.
It is accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
The warning lamp comes on tempo-
rarily in the case of minor faults.
In the case of major faults, the warning
lamp remains on until the operating
fault is rectifi ed. Contact a CITROËN
dealer as soon as possible.
Braking
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
one of the braking systems:
- signifi cant drop in the fl uid level
in the circuit,
- electronic brake force distribu-
tion (EBFD) faulty (simultane-
ous lighting of the ABS warning
lamp),
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer.
Dynamic stability control
(ESP/ASR).
The ESP/ASR system is put
into service automatically
when the vehicle is started.
Unless the system has been
deactivated, if this warning lamp
and the indicator lamp on the button
come on continuously, this indicates
the occurrence of a fault in the ESP/
ASR system or in the hill start assist
system.
Engine autodiagnostics system
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
the engine management
system.
If it fl ashes, it indicates the occur-
rence of a fault in the emission control
system.
Central alert
- punctured wheel,
- braking,
- coolant temperature,
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Contact a CITROËN dealer.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
the anti-lock braking system.
However, this does not pre-
vent operation of the vehicle's servo-
assisted braking system.
27
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Airbags
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
one of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems.
Door open
A door, the boot or the bonnet
is open:
- if the speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp
comes on continuously.
-
if the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp comes
on continuously, accompanied by
an audible signal.
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened
Driver's seat belt not fas-
tened:
- The warning lamp comes on if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched on
and between 0 and 12 mph (ap-
prox. 20 km/h).
- Above 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h),
the warning lamp fl ashes for ap-
proximately 120 seconds, accom-
panied by an audible signal. It
then remains on.
Front passenger and rear passenger
seat belts not fastened:
- When the ignition is switched on,
the warning lamp always comes
on if the passenger's seat belt is
not fastened.
It goes off when the engine is running,
doors closed and after 30 seconds.
- If a seat belt is unfastened, the
warning lamp comes on between
0 and 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph).
- Above 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph),
the warning lamp fl ashes for
approximately 120 seconds, ac-
companied by an audible signal.
Service indicator
System which informs the driver
when the next service is due, in ac-
cordance with the manufacturer's
servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is
due is calculated from the last indi-
cator zero reset. It is determined by
two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
27
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Airbags
If this comes on, it indicates
the occurrence of a fault in
one of the airbag or seat belt
pretensioner systems.
Door open
A door, the boot or the bonnet
is open:
- if the speed is below 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp
comes on continuously.
-
if the speed is higher than 6 mph
(10 km/h), this warning lamp comes
on continuously, accompanied by
an audible signal.
Seat belt not fastened/unfastened
Driver's seat belt not fas-
tened:
- The warning lamp comes on if the
driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched on
and between 0 and 12 mph (ap-
prox. 20 km/h).
- Above 12 mph (approx. 20 km/h),
the warning lamp fl ashes for ap-
proximately 120 seconds, accom-
panied by an audible signal. It
then remains on.
Front passenger and rear passenger
seat belts not fastened:
- When the ignition is switched on,
the warning lamp always comes
on if the passenger's seat belt is
not fastened.
It goes off when the engine is running,
doors closed and after 30 seconds.
- If a seat belt is unfastened, the
warning lamp comes on between
0 and 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph).
- Above 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph),
the warning lamp fl ashes for
approximately 120 seconds, ac-
companied by an audible signal.
Service indicator
System which informs the driver
when the next service is due, in ac-
cordance with the manufacturer's
servicing schedule.
The point at which the service is
due is calculated from the last indi-
cator zero reset. It is determined by
two parameters:
- the distance travelled,
- the time elapsed since the last
service.
28
I
M O N I T O R I N G
5 seconds after the ignition is switched
on, the spanner is switched off ; the
distance recorder resumes its normal
operation. The display then indicates
the total and trip distances.
Less than 620 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
Example : 558 miles/900 km remain
before the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates:
Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the spanner fl ashes
to indicate that the service must be
carried out as soon as possible.
Example: the service is overdue by
186 miles/300 km.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The
spanner remains on to indicate that
a service must be carried out soon.
5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the distance recorder
resumes its normal operation. The
spanner remains lit .
More than 620 miles (1 000 km)
remain before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the spanner symbol-
ising the service operations comes
on. The distance recorder display
line indicates the distance remaining
before the next service is due.
Example: 2 976 miles/4800 km re-
main before the next service is due.
For 5 seconds after the ignition is
switched on, the display indicates:
The distance remaining may be
weighted by the time factor, depend-
ing on the driver's driving habits.
Therefore, the spanner may also
come on if you have exceeded the
two year service interval.
29
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Service indicator zero reset
Engine oil level indicator
After each service, the service indi-
cator must be reset to zero.
The procedure for resetting to zero
is as follows:
switch off the ignition,
press and hold the trip distance
recorder zero reset button,
switch on the ignition; the dis-
tance recorder display begins a
countdown,
when the display indicates "=0" ,
release the button; the spanner
disappears.
System which informs the driver
whether the engine oil level is cor-
rect or not.
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when the ignition is
switched on, after the service infor-
mation.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and
the engine has been off for more
than 15 minutes.
Oil level correct
Oil level low
This is indicated by the fl ashing of
"OIL" , accompanied by an audible
signal and a message on the multi-
function screen.
If the low oil level is confi rmed by a
check using the dipstick, it is essen-
tial that the level is topped up to pre-
vent damage to the engine.
Oil level gauge fault
This is indicated by the fl ashing of
"OIL --" . Contact a CITROËN dealer.
Dipstick
Refer to the "Checks" section to lo-
cate the dipstick and the oil fi ller cap
on your engine.
There are 2 marks on the
dipstick:
- A = max; never ex-
ceed this level,
- B = min; top up the
level via the oil fi ller
cap, using the type of
oil suited to your en-
gine.
Following this operation, if you wish
to disconnect the battery, lock the
vehicle and wait at least fi ve minutes
for the zero reset to be taken into ac-
count.
30
I
M O N I T O R I N G
Total distance recorder
System which measures the total
distance travelled by the vehicle
during its life.
The total and trip distances are dis-
played for thirty seconds when the
ignition is switched off, when the
driver's door is opened and when
the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Trip distance recorder
System which measures a distance
travelled during a day or other pe-
riod since it was reset to zero by the
driver.
With the ignition on, press the
button until zeros appear.
Dashboard lighting rheostat
Activation
Turn control A or press control
B to adjust the brightness of the
dashboard lighting,
With control B , press until the
brightness is at maximum, re-
lease, press until you reach mini-
mum.
Deactivation
When the vehicle lighting is off, or in
day mode in the case of vehicles fi t-
ted with daytime running lamps, the
button has no effect.
System permitting manual adjustment
of the brightness of the dashboard to
suit the level of ambient light.
The rheostat is active if the sidelamps
are on and applies to:
- the instrument panel,
- the display screens.
31
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN A
Presentation
1. Time
2. Date and display zone
3. Ambient temperature
When the ambient temperature is
between +3 °C and -3 °C, the tem-
perature display fl ashes (ice risk).
The ambient temperature displayed
may be greater than the actual tem-
perature, if the vehicle is parked in
bright sunlight.
The display of certain types of in-
formation is sometimes by scrolling
and sometimes by alternating be-
tween them.
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Scrolling in the screen menus
C. Selection and confi rmation in the
menus of the function chosen or
the value modifi ed
D. Cancellation of the operation or
return to the previous display
E. Selection of the type of informa-
tion to be displayed in zone 2
(date, radio-CD and trip recorder)
B or F. Within the menus, choice
of activation/deactivation of
functions and selection of
adjustments
Controls Main Menu
By pressing button A , then using
button B , you have access to the fol-
lowing functions:
Radio-CD (see "Audio and
Telematics")
Vehicle confi guration , to activate/
deactivate:
- operation of the rear wiper,
-
automatic guide-me-home lighting.
Options , for display of alert mes-
sages
Display adjustments , for alter-
ing the date and the time on the
screens
Languages , for choosing the
screen language
Units , giving you access to the
choice of units of temperature
and units of fuel consumption
It is recommended that the driver
should not operate the controls
while the vehicle is in motion.
32
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
Displaying the log of alerts
Press on A .
Use B to select the submenu for
options. Confi rm with two presses
on C .
You can cancel the start of the display
by pressing button E to abandon and
confi rming by pressing C .
Alerts signalled previously but not
resolved, will scroll in the display for
recall.
To clear the displaying of an alert,
press D .
Adjusting the date and time
Press on A .
Use B to select the submenu for
display adjustments, then con-
fi rm by pressing C .
Press B to select what you want
to modify: year, month, day, hour,
minutes, mode of display.
Make your adjustment by press-
ing F . You can continue your ad-
justments by selecting a different
element by presses on B . When
you have fi nished your adjust-
ments, press C .
Configuring the vehicle
functions
Press on A .
Use B to select the sub-menu for
personalisation confi guration of
your vehicle, then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Select the function to be confi g-
ured by pressing B .
The system tells you whether
the function status is active or in-
active. Modify this status with a
press on F .
Confi rm with a press on C .
Choosing the language
Press on A .
Use B to select the submenu for
languages. Confi rm your choice
with a press on C .
With presses on F , select the
language of your choice, then
confi rm with a press on C .
Choosing the units
Press on A .
Press B to select the sub-menu
for Units. Confi rm your choice
with a press on C .
Press B to select the type of unit
you wish to modify (Temperature
or Fuel Consumption).
With presses on F , select the
unit of your choice, then confi rm
with a press on C .
This choice concerns all the in-
formation (Consumption - Speed)
appearing on the display screens.
33
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN C
Main Menu
Presentation
Radio-CD
(see "Audio and
Telematics")
Trip computer
This permits:
Bluetooth
®
hands-free
system
(see "Audio and
Telematics")
Controls
1. Time
2. Ambient temperature
3. Date and display zone
When the ambient temperature is
between +3 °C and -3 °C, the tem-
perature display fl ashes (ice risk).
The ambient temperature displayed
may be greater than the actual tem-
perature, if the vehicle is parked in
bright sunlight.
It is recommended that the driver
should not operate the controls
while the vehicle is in motion.
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Scrolling in the screen menus
C. Selection and confi rmation in the
menus of the function chosen or
the value modifi ed
D. Cancellation of the operation or
return to the previous display
E. Selection of the type of informa-
tion to be displayed permanently
(date, radio-CD, trip computer)
on the right of the screen (See
"Trip computer")
Press button A to view the "Main
Menu" of the multifunction screen.
This menu gives you access to the
following functions:
- entering the distance to your
destination,
- access to the log of alerts (recall
of alerts signalled previously),
- access to the status of functions,
such as the activation/deactiva-
tion of the automatic illumination
of headlamps, of the automatic
rain sensitive wipers, of the ESP...
34
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
Personalisation -
Configuration
This permits activation/deactivation
of the:
- automatic operation of the rear
wiper when reverse gear is en-
gaged,
- automatic guide-me-home lighting,
- Xenon dual-function directional
headlamps,
and selection of the:
- brightness intensity, time, date
and units,
- screen language.
Activating/deactivating the
rear screen wipe when you
engage reverse gear
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Then select the sub-menu for ve-
hicle parameters. Confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Using B , select "parking assis-
tance". Confi rm your choice with
a press on C .
Then by pressing C , select/
deselect "activation of rear wip-
er in reverse gear" to activate/
deactivate this.
Confi rm with "OK" on the screen.
Activating/deactivating the
automatic guide-me-home
lighting
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Then select the sub-menu for ve-
hicle parameters. Confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Using B , select "lighting and
signalling". Confi rm your choice
with a press on C .
Then by pressing C , select/dese-
lect "guide-me-home headlamps"
to activate/deactivate this. After
activation, choose its duration:
press on C , then use B to select
the duration and then press on C .
Confi rm with "OK" on the screen.
Activating/deactivating
the Xenon dual-function
directional headlamps
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Then select the sub-menu for ve-
hicle parameters. Confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Using B , select "driving assis-
tance". Confi rm your choice with
a press on C .
Then by pressing C , select/de-
select "directional headlamps" to
activate/deactivate them.
Confi rm with "OK" on the screen.
35
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
Adjusting the date and time
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Select the display confi guration
using B . Confi rm with a press
on C .
Select the adjustment for the
date and time, using B . Confi rm
with a press on C .
Choosing the units
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Select the display confi guration
using B . Confi rm with a press
on C .
Then select the sub-menu for
units. Confi rm your choice with a
press on C .
Using B , select the unit you wish
to modify (Temperature or Fuel
consumption), then confi rm by
pressing C .
Confi rm with "OK" on the screen.
This choice concerns all the informa-
tion (Consumption - Speed) appearing
on the screens.
Choosing the language
Press on A .
Use B to select "Personalisation-
Confi guration", then confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Make your choice of language
using B . Confi rm with a press
on C .
Using B , select the language and
confi rm your choice with a press
on C .
Confi rm with "OK" on the screen.
Press B to select the values you
wish to modify. Confi rm your
choice with a press on C .
Make your adjustments by
pressing B , confi rming each ad-
justment choice by pressing C .
Validate with "OK" on the screen.
36
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
NAVIDRIVE MULTIFUNCTION
SCREEN
Presentation
1. Ambient temperature
2. Directory
3. Date
4. Telephone
5. Time
When the ambient temperature is
between +3 °C and -3 °C, the tem-
perature display fl ashes (risk of ice).
The ambient temperature displayed
may be greater than the actual tem-
perature, if the vehicle is parked in
bright sunlight.
It is recommended that the driver
should not operate the controls
while the vehicle is in motion.
Controls Main Menu
Traffi c Information
Navigation/Guidance
Map
Audio Functions
Telematics
Confi guration,
for adjusting various param-
eters (date, time, units)
Video
Vehicle Diagnostics
A. Access to the "Main Menu"
B. Scrolling in the screen menus
C. Selection and confi rmation in the
menus of the function chosen or
the value modifi ed
D. Cancellation of the operation or
return to the previous display
E. Selection of the type of informa-
tion to be displayed permanently
(date, radio-CD, trip computer)
on the right of the screen
Press on the button A to view the
"Main Menu" of the multifunction
screen.
This menu gives you access to the
following functions (see "NaviDrive
Instructions"):
37
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
TRIP COMPUTER
System which provides current infor-
mation concerning the trip travelled
(range, fuel consumption...).
Monochrome screen A
Information displays
Press the control for more than
two seconds to reset to zero the
distance travelled, the average
fuel consumption and the aver-
age speed.
Zero reset
The trip computer provides the fol-
lowing information:
- range,
- current fuel consumption,
- distance travelled,
- average fuel consumption,
- average speed.
The next press then returns you
to the normal display.
Press the button, located at the
end of the wiper stalk , to display
the various items of trip comput-
er data in succession.
38
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
TRIP COMPUTER
System which provides current infor-
mation concerning the route travelled
(range, fuel consumption, …).
Monochrome screen C
NaviDrive colour screen
Display of information
Trip zero reset
Press the button, located at the
end of the wiper stalk , to display
the various trip computer infor-
mation groups in succession:
- the current information
group with:
range,
current fuel
consumption,
distance remaining
to be travelled,
- the trip "1" group
with:
distance travelled,
average fuel
consumption,
average speed,
for the fi rst trip.
- the trip "2" group
with:
the distance
travelled,
the average fuel
consumption,
the average speed,
for the second trip.
When the trip required is dis-
played, press the control for
more than two seconds.
The trips "1" and "2" are indepen-
dent but their use is identical.
Trip "1" permits, for example, daily
calculations, and trip "2" monthly
calculations.
39
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
"Trip computer" menu
System which provides general in-
formation concerning the status of
certain equipment with which your
vehicle is equipped, such as the alert
log, the status of the functions...
Alert log
This summarises the active warning
messages, displaying them in suc-
cession on the multifunction screen.
Status of functions
This summarises the active or inac-
tive status of systems present on the
vehicle.
Enter distance to destination
This enables you to enter an ap-
proximate value for the distance to
the fi nal destination.
Monochrome screen C
"Vehicle Diagnostics" menu
Press the "MENU" button to gain
access to the general menu.
Turn the dial and press it to se-
lect the "Vehicle Diagnostics"
menu.
On the "Vehicle Diagnostics"
menu, select one of the following
applications:
- "Alert log",
- "Status of functions".
Press the "MENU" button to gain
access to the general menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK"
button to select the "Trip com-
puter" menu.
On the "Trip computer" menu,
select one of the following appli-
cations:
- "Alert log",
- "Status of functions",
- "Enter distance to destination".
NaviDrive colour screen
38
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
TRIP COMPUTER
System which provides current infor-
mation concerning the route travelled
(range, fuel consumption, …).
Monochrome screen C
NaviDrive colour screen
Display of information
Trip zero reset
Press the button, located at the
end of the wiper stalk , to display
the various trip computer infor-
mation groups in succession:
- the current information
group with:
range,
current fuel
consumption,
distance remaining
to be travelled,
- the trip "1" group
with:
distance travelled,
average fuel
consumption,
average speed,
for the fi rst trip.
- the trip "2" group
with:
the distance
travelled,
the average fuel
consumption,
the average speed,
for the second trip.
When the trip required is dis-
played, press the control for
more than two seconds.
The trips "1" and "2" are indepen-
dent but their use is identical.
Trip "1" permits, for example, daily
calculations, and trip "2" monthly
calculations.
39
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
"Trip computer" menu
System which provides general in-
formation concerning the status of
certain equipment with which your
vehicle is equipped, such as the alert
log, the status of the functions...
Alert log
This summarises the active warning
messages, displaying them in suc-
cession on the multifunction screen.
Status of functions
This summarises the active or inac-
tive status of systems present on the
vehicle.
Enter distance to destination
This enables you to enter an ap-
proximate value for the distance to
the fi nal destination.
Monochrome screen C
"Vehicle Diagnostics" menu
Press the "MENU" button to gain
access to the general menu.
Turn the dial and press it to se-
lect the "Vehicle Diagnostics"
menu.
On the "Vehicle Diagnostics"
menu, select one of the following
applications:
- "Alert log",
- "Status of functions".
Press the "MENU" button to gain
access to the general menu.
Press the arrows, then the "OK"
button to select the "Trip com-
puter" menu.
On the "Trip computer" menu,
select one of the following appli-
cations:
- "Alert log",
- "Status of functions",
- "Enter distance to destination".
NaviDrive colour screen
40
II
M U L T I F U N C T I O N S C R E E N S
A few definitions…
Range
(miles or km)
This value may vary following a
change in the style of driving or
the relief, resulting in a signifi cant
change in the current fuel con-
sumption.
When the range falls below 20 miles
(30 km), dashes are displayed. After
fi lling with at least 5 litres of fuel,
the range is recalculated and is dis-
played when it exceeds 60 miles
(100 km).
If dashes are displayed continu-
ously while driving in place of the
digits, contact a CITROËN dealer.
This indicates the distance which
can still be travelled with the fuel re-
maining in the tank in relation to the
average fuel consumption over the
last few miles (kilometres) travelled.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
Average fuel
consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
This is the average fuel consump-
tion since the last trip computer zero
reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
This is the average speed calculat-
ed since the last trip computer zero
reset (ignition on).
Distance travelled
(miles or km)
This indicates the distance travelled
since the last trip computer zero reset.
Distance remaining to
destination
(miles or km)
This is the distance remaining to be
travelled to the fi nal destination. It
is either calculated instantly by the
navigation system, if guidance is ac-
tivated, or entered by the user.
If the distance is not entered, dashes
are displayed in place of the digits.
This function is only displayed from
20 mph (30 km/h).
This is the average fuel consump-
tion during the last few seconds.
41
III
C O M F O R T
RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR VENTILATION, HEATING AND
AIR CONDITIONING
Air inlet
Check that the exterior grille for the
air inlet, at the bottom of the wind-
screen, is clean and free of dead
leaves, snow, etc.
Air distribution
- Windscreen demisting/defrosting
vents.
- Front side windows demisting/
defrosting vents.
- Adjustable and closing side air
vents.
- Adjustable and closing central
air vents.
- Front occupant footwell air outlets.
42
III
C O M F O R T
Air conditioning
To ensure that your system operates
correctly, it is recommended to have
it checked regularly.
Water arising from condensation
in the air conditioning drains away
through a hole provided for this pur-
pose. A pool of water may thus form
under the vehicle when stationary.
To keep the air conditioning com-
pressor well sealed, it is essential to
operate the air conditioning at least
once in every month.
Regardless of the season, the air
conditioning is useful, since it re-
moves humidity and condensation.
To be effective, the air conditioning
should only be used with the win-
dows closed.
If after a lengthy stop in bright sun-
light the interior temperature is ex-
cessive, ventilate the passenger
compartment by opening the win-
dows for a few moments, then close
them again.
The air conditioning operates by using
power from the engine. This results in
a slight increase in fuel consumption.
Dust filter/Odour filter
(active carbon)
There is a fi lter for excluding odours
and dust.
This fi lter has to be changed in ac-
cordance with the vehicle servicing
schedule (see "Maintenance and
Warranty Guide").
Air circulation
Maximum comfort is obtained when
there is a good distribution of air in
the passenger compartment, both in
the front and in the rear.
For optimum operating effi ciency,
take care not to obstruct the air out-
lets under the front seats.
Air vents
The face-level air vents have grilles
and thumbwheels to adjust the air fl ow
and direction (up-down, right-left).
The automatic regulation of the air
conditioning, inside the cabin, uses
the sunshine sensor located on the
dashboard behind the instrument
panel.
Be careful not to obstruct it.
Sensor
43
III
C O M F O R T
HEATING/VENTILATION
Air fl ow to the face level
vents.
1 - Adjustment of the air
distribution
Demisting - Defrosting.
Flow to the windscreen
and front side windows.
Distribution to the wind-
screen, side windows and
footwells.
Flow to front and rear pas-
senger footwells.
Distribution from the air blower can
be altered to suit your requirments
by placing the distribution control 1
in an intermediate position.
2 - Air recirculation
3 - Heater blower control
The air blower operates only when
the engine is running. For optimum
comfort in the passenger compart-
ment, the control should not remain
in position "0" .
This position is for exclud-
ing disagreeable odours
or emissions coming from
outside the cabin. With a
press on control 2 , the entry of air
from outside is closed off, the lamp
comes on.
This should be cancelled as soon
as possible to prevent condensation
from forming and to allow fresh air
into the cabin.
To deactivate air recirculation, press
again on control 2 , the warning lamp
goes out.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING
44
III
C O M F O R T
Demisting- defrosting of
the windscreen and front
side windows
Place the controls for tempera-
ture 4 and air fl ow 3 on maxi-
mum.
Close the central air vents.
Operate the air conditioning by
pressing the control 6 , the warn-
ing lamp comes on.
The system should not be in air recir-
culation.
5 - Rear screen demisting
Can only be operated with the engine
running.
One press on control 5 acti-
vates the electric demisting of
the rear screen and, accord-
ing to version, the door mir-
rors. The warning lamp comes on.
It switches off automatically to avoid
excessive power consumption.
One press stops the demisting.
A further press starts it again.
If the engine is stopped before the
end of demisting, the operation will
resume the next time the engine is
started.
6 - Air conditioning
The air conditioning will only operate
when the engine is running.
Press on control 6 The warn-
ing lamp comes on.
For air conditioning, the air
blower control 3 must not be
on position "0" .
Air conditioning is obtained by mix-
ing the warm air with refrigerated air.
The temperature control 4 adjusts
the air conditioning provided the
control 6 is operational.
4 - Temperature control
The heating/ventilation and manual
air conditioning systems can only
function with the engine running.
45
III
C O M F O R T
DIGITAL AIR CONDITIONING
1 - Automatic operation
This system automatically regulates
temperature, air fl ow and air distribu-
tion in the passenger compartment
according to the temperature selected
(for each side, right and left).
It provides an optimum level of comfort
regardless of the ambient conditions,
by permanent use of the automatic
air conditioning mode (press the AUTO
button ) and with all the vents open .
Having no airfl ow prevents the air
conditioning and the system in gen-
eral from working.
To prevent the formation of con-
densation inside the vehicle in
cold and damp conditions, the use
of AUTO mode is recommended.
2 - Adjustment of
temperature on left
hand side
To set and display the de-
sired temperature, rotate
control 2 or 3 :
The display "HI" (high) corre-
sponds to a demand for maxi-
mum heating (above 27).
The display "LO" (low) cor-
responds to a demand for
maximum air conditioning
(below 15).
3 - Adjustment of
temperature on right
hand side
- To the left to lower the temperature
-
To the right to raise the temperature
The difference between the tem-
peratures on the right and on the left
cannot be greater than 3 degrees.
A setting around 21 will provide a
temperature that is comfortable.
Depending on your requirements,
an adjustment between 18 and 24 is
normal.
A press on this control, con-
fi rmed by the display of "A/C"
and "AUTO" , automatically
manages all the 5 following
functions according to the tempera-
ture chosen:
- Flow of air.
- Cabin temperature.
- Distribution of air.
- Air conditioning.
- Recycling of air.
To enable the system to operate, all
the air vents should be kept open.
This is the normal operating
mode.
46
III
C O M F O R T
When you enter the vehicle, the
temperature inside the vehicle
may be much colder (or warmer)
than is comfortable. There is no
point in modifying the displayed
temperature to try to attain the
desired level of comfort. The
system operates automatically
to correct this temperature differ-
ence as rapidly as possible.
When starting the engine from
cold, in order to avoid distributing
too much cold air, the blower will
attain its optimum level gradually.
Manual operation of one or more
functions
Each of the functions 4 , 6 and 7 can
be adjusted manually.
Display of the "AUTO" function then
disappears.
Central and lateral air
vents.
Central and lateral air
vents and passenger
footwells.
Passenger footwells.
The windscreen, front
side windows and pas-
senger footwells.
The windscreen and
front side windows.
4 - Air conditioning 6 - Adjustment of the air
distribution
5 - Air recirculation
To stop the air conditioning,
press on the control 4 . The
symbol "A/C" disappears.
To restart it, press again
on the control 4 . The symbol "A/C"
displays.
When you press on control 5 ,
the entry of air from outside
is blocked off and the associ-
ated symbol is displayed.
This function can also be accessed
by pressing the appropriate button
on the steering wheel.
While retaining the other settings,
this position excludes disagreeable
odours or emissions coming from
outside. It should be cancelled as
soon as possible to prevent misting
and to allow fresh air into the cabin.
To deactivate the air recirculation,
press again on control 5 .
Press the button 6 succes-
sively so that the multifunc-
tion screen shows, in turn,
the air fl ow to:
47
III
C O M F O R T
7 - Air flow
Heater blower speed: press button:
9 - Demisting - defrosting the
rear screen
To increase it
To decrease it.
The level of air fl ow is represented on
the display by the progressive fi lling
of the fan blades.
A press on the control 7 deactivates
the "AUTO" function. To restart it,
press again on the control AUTO .
To avoid condensation and poor air
quality in the passenger compart-
ment, it is recommended always to
maintain a suffi cient fl ow of air.
8 - Demisting - defrosting the
windscreen and front side
windows
While it is operating, the
warning lamp lights and the
symbol appears on the mul-
tifunction screen.
This control is for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the windscreen, acting
automatically on the air blower fl ow,
air distribution, air conditioning and
air entry.
To stop it, press again on control 8
or on the control AUTO .
You should not have air recirculation
selected.
When this function is work-
ing, the warning lamp comes
on and the symbol appears
on the multifunction screen.
This control is for rapid demisting or
defrosting of the rear screen.
It switches off automatically to avoid
excessive consumption of power.
To stop it, press again on the
control 9 .
Press AUTO to return the system
to automatic operation.
48
III
C O M F O R T
SCENTED AIR FRESHENER
Removing the cartridge Fitting the new cartridge
As a safety measure:
use the scented air freshener
and cartridges only for the pur-
pose intended, as described in
the user instructions,
do not handle the cartridge
while driving.
Kep the cartridge packaging to-
gether with the user instructions
and precautions.
System which spreads a fragrance
in the passenger compartment as
required, by means of the adjust-
ment thumb wheel and the various
fragrance cartridges available.
It is located to the right of the central
air vent.
You can stop or adjust the fl ow of
scented air, via thumb wheel 1 .
Take the cap 2 from your new
cartridge and place it in the small
orifi ce of the cartridge you are
removing.
Remove the cartridge from the
air freshener.
Take the cap 2 off the head of the
cartridge.
Insert the new cartridge in the air
freshener.
The central air vents should be open.
The cartridges need replacing from
time to time.
Do not dismantle the cartridges.
Do not touch the scent mesh.
Do not try to refi ll the scented air
freshener or the cartridges. Only
use original CITROËN cartridges.
Keep these items away from chil-
dren and animals.
Avoid any contact with the skin and
eyes.
In the event of ingestion, consult a
doctor and show them the packag-
ing or the label .
49
III
C O M F O R T
FRONT SEATS
MANUAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. Forwards-backwards
Raise the control bar, then slide the
seat to the position desired.
2. Lumbar support
Rotate the control knob until you at-
tain the desired position.
3. Driver's seat height
adjustment
Raise or lower the the control lever
the number of times necessary to
obtain the position desired.
4. Backrest angle
Operate the control lever and adjust
the angle of the backrest.
It is possible to incline the back-
rest 45° rearwards by tilting it until it
locks; to unlock it, lift the control.
5. Access to the rear seats
To gain access to or exit from the
rear seats, tilt the control lever for-
wards to fold the backrest and move
the seat forward.
When repositioning, the seat returns
to its initial position.
Ensure that the seat is locked se-
curely.
Never drive without the head re-
straints fi tted. They must be in
place and adjusted correctly.
6. Head restraint
To raise it, pull it upwards. To lower
it, press on the control as well as on
the head restraint.
The adjustment is correct when the
top of the head restraint is level with
the top of the head.
It can also be adjusted for tilt.
To remove it, press on the unlocking
button and pull it upwards.
To adjust the head restraint forwards/
backwards, move the base of the
head restraint to obtain the position
desired.
50
III
C O M F O R T
FRONT SEATS
1. Adjustment of the
seat height and angle,
forwards-backwards
2. Adjustment of backrest
angle and lumbar support
The seats can also be adjusted elec-
trically for a short period:
- on opening one of the front
doors,
- after switching off the ignition.
Heated seats control
ELECTRIC ADJUSTMENTS
Raise or lower the front of
control to raise or lower the
front of the seat base (on
driver’s seat).
Raise or lower the rear of
control to raise or lower the
seat.
Action control forwards or
backwards to slide the seat
forwards/backwards.
Push the top of control for-
wards or backwards to ad-
just the backrest angle.
Raise or lower control to in-
crease or decrease the lum-
bar support.
With the engine running, the front
seats can be heated individually.
Use the corresponding adjust-
ment wheel, placed on the inner
side of each front seat, to switch
on and select the level of heating
required:
0 : Off.
1 : Low.
2 : Medium.
3 : High.
51
III
C O M F O R T
Storing driving positions
System which takes into account the
electrical settings of the driver's seat
and door mirrors. It enables you to
store up to two positions using the
buttons on the side of the driver's
seat.
Storing a position
Using buttons M/1/2
Switch on the ignition.
Adjust your seat and the door
mirrors.
Press button M , then press but-
ton 1 or 2 within four seconds.
An audible signal is heard indicating
that the position has been stored.
Storing a new position cancels the
previous position.
Recalling a stored position
Ignition on or engine running
Briefl y press button 1 or 2 to re-
call the corresponding position.
An audible signal is heard indicating
the end of the adjustment.
When the ignition is on, after a few
consecutive position recalls, the
function will be deactivated until the
engine is started, to prevent dis-
charging of the battery.
Vehicle moving
Press and hold button 1 or 2
until the audible signal is heard
indicating the end of the adjust-
ment.
Do not try to store a driving position
while driving.
52
III
C O M F O R T
REAR SEATS
Bench seat, the left-hand section
(2/3) or right-hand section (1/3) of
which can be folded independently
to vary the load space in the boot.
Rear head restraints
The rear head restraints can be re-
moved and have two positions:
- high, when in use,
- low, to store.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up-
wards.
To lower it, press the catch then
press on the head restraint.
To remove it, move it to the high po-
sition, push the catch and pull the
head restraint upwards.
To put it back in place, engage the
rods of the head restraint in the
holes keeping them in line with the
backrest.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they must be in place and
adjusted correctly.
Folding the seat cushion
raise the front of the seat cushion,
tilt it towards the front seats.
When repositioning the seat base,
make sure that the seat belt buckles
are back in place.
When you fold a rear seat cushion,
you should also fold the corresponding
backrest.
Before tipping the rear seat, make
sure that the seat belts will not be
snagged or trapped by the seat and
its catches. Position them carefully
to the sides of the backrests.
Before folding the seat
53
III
C O M F O R T
Removing the seat base
To increase the load space, the rear
seats are removable.
detach one of the pivots from its
fi xing,
disengage the other pivot to re-
move the seat assembly.
Folding the backrest
stow the head restraints,
press on control A located on the
side of the backrest,
tilt fully forwards.
When returning the seat backrest to
the normal position, ensure that it
locks into place: the red warning in-
dicator, located on the control, must
not be visible.
When you are handling the rear
seats, avoid trapping the seat belts
and make sure that the belt buckles
are positioned correctly.
54
III
C O M F O R T
MIRRORS
Door mirrors
Each mirror is adjustable to provide
the rear view needed for overtaking
or parking. They can also be folded
for parking in confi ned spaces.
Adjustment
With the ignition on:
move control A to the right or to
the left to select the correspond-
ing mirror,
move control B in one of four
directions to adjust,
return control A to the central
position.
The objects observed are, in reality,
closer than they appear.
Take this into account in order to
correctly judge the distance of ve-
hicles approaching from behind.
Folding
From outside: lock the vehicle
using the remote control or the
key.
From inside: with the ignition on,
pull control A rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using con-
trol A , they will not unfold when the
vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on
control A .
Unfolding
From outside: unlock the vehicle
using the remote control or the
key.
From inside: with the ignition on,
pull control A rearwards.
The folding and unfolding of the door
mirrors using the remote control can
be deactivated by a CITROËN dealer.
Never fold or unfold the electric folding
mirrors manually.
Automatic tilting in reverse gear
System which provides a view of the
ground during parking manoeuvres
in reverse gear.
Programming
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Select and adjust the left-hand
and right-hand mirrors in suc-
cession.
The adjustment is stored immedi-
ately.
Switching off
Exit reverse gear and wait
ten seconds.
or
Return control A to the central
position.
The mirror glass returns to its initial
position.
The mirror glass also returns to its
initial position:
-
if the speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h),
- if the engine is switched off.
Switching on
With the engine running, engage
reverse gear.
Move control A to the right or to
the left to select the correspond-
ing mirror.
The glass of the mirror selected tilts
downwards, in accordance with its
programming.
The demisting/defrosting of the door
mirrors is linked to that of the rear
screen.
55
III
C O M F O R T
Rear view mirror
Adjustable mirror providing a central
rearward view.
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system,
useful in poor light.
Manual day/night model
Adjustment
Adjust the mirror so that the
glass is directed correctly in the
"day" position.
Day/night position
Pull the lever to change to the
"night" anti-dazzle position.
Push the lever to change to the
normal "day" position.
By means of a sensor, which mea-
sures the light from the rear of the
vehicle, this system automatically
and progressively changes between
the day and night uses.
It has an anti-dazzle system which
darkens the mirror glass: this reduc-
es any driver discomfort caused by
the light beam of following vehicles,
the sun...
In order to guarantee optimum vis-
ibility during your manoeuvres, the
mirror lightens automatically when
reverse gear is engaged.
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT
The height and reach of the steer-
ing wheel can be adjusted to adapt
the driving position to the size of the
driver.
Adjustment
First, adjust the driver's seat to
the most suitable position.
When stationary , pull the con-
trol lever to unlock the steering
wheel adjustment.
Adjust for height and reach.
Push the control lever to lock the
steering wheel adjustment.
After locking, if you press fi rmly on
the steering wheel, a slight click may
be heard.
As a safety precaution, the mirrors
must be adjusted to reduce the
"blind spot".
Automatic day/night model
As a safety precaution, these op-
erations must only be carried out
while the vehicle is stationary.
56
IV
A C C E S S
REMOTE CONTROL KEY
System which permits central unloc-
king or locking of the vehicle using
the lock or remotely. It is also used to
locate the vehicle, activate the guide-
me-home lighting and start the engine,
as well as providing protection against
theft.
Unlocking the vehicle
Complete unlocking using
the remote control
Unfolding the key
First press button A to unfold the
key.
Press the open padlock
to unlock the vehicle.
Complete unlocking using
the key
Turn the key to the left in the
driver's door lock to unlock the
vehicle.
Unlocking is confi rmed by rapid fl as-
hing of the direction indicators and
switching on of the courtesy lamp for
approximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mir-
rors unfold at the same time.
Locking is confi rmed by fi xed lighting
of the direction indicators for approxi-
mately two seconds.
According to version, the door mir-
rors fold at the same time.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking using the remote
control
Press the closed pad-
lock to lock the vehicle
completely.
Press the closed padlock for more
than two seconds to close the win-
dows in addition to locking.
If one of the doors or the boot is
still open, the central locking does
not take place.
When the vehicle is locked, if it is
unlocked inadvertently, it will relock
automatically after thirty seconds
unless a door is opened.
The folding and unfolding of the
door mirrors using the remote
control can be deactivated by a
CITROËN dealer.
Normal locking using the key
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the ve-
hicle completely.
57
IV
A C C E S S
Deadlocking using the key
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual cen-
tral control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
First press button A to fold the
key.
Locating your vehicle
Press the closed padlock to lo-
cate your locked vehicle in a car
park.
This is indicated by lighting of the
courtesy lamps and fl ashing of the di-
rection indicators for a few seconds.
Guide-me-home lighting
In order to activate this function from
the remote control, the lighting stalk
must be in the "O" (lighting off) or
"AUTO" position.
A press on button B operates the
guide-me-home lighting (lighting
of the sidelamps and dipped beam
headlamps for approximately one
minute).
A second press before the end of
the timed period cancels the guide-
me-home lighting.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip
which has a special code. When the
ignition is switched on, this code
must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser
locks the engine management sys-
tem a few minutes after the ignition
is switched off and prevents starting
of the engine by anyone who does
not have the key.
In the event of a mal-
function, you are in-
formed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an
audible signal and a
message on the multi-
function screen.
In this case, your vehicle does not
start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
soon as possible.
Folding the key
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Press the closed pad-
lock to lock the vehicle
completely or press the
closed padlock for more
than two seconds to
close the windows au-
tomatically in addition
to locking (according to
version).
Press the closed padlock again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the
vehicle completely and hold it
in this position for more than
two seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in addition to
locking (according to version).
Turn the key to the right again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confi rmed by fi xed
lighting of the direction indicators for
approximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
58
IV
A C C E S S
STARTING
1. "S": Steering lock
To unlock the steering, gently move
the steering wheel while turning the
key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position
Depending on the version of your
vehicle, the orange and red war-
ning lamps should also come on for
a short time.
3. "D": Starter
Release the key as soon the engine
has started.
If the fi rst attempt fails, switch off the
ignition. Wait ten seconds then ope-
rate the starter again.
Steering lock
1. " S": After removing the key, turn
the steering wheel to lock the steer-
ing. The key can only be removed in
position S .
2. "M": Ignition switched on, the
steering is unlocked (by turning the
key to position M , move the steering
wheel gently if necessary).
3. "D": Starter position.
Never turn the key to this position
when the engine is running.
Key in ignition audible
warning
If you forget to remove the key from
the ignition, there is an audible
warning when the driver’s door is
opened.
Do not run the engine in an en-
closed space or where there is
insuffi cient ventilation.
It is essential always to keep
the engine running in order to
retain braking and steering as-
sistance .
Never remove the ignition key
before the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Vehicles equipped with a
turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having
allowed it to run for a few seconds at
idle, this being the time required for
the turbocharger to return to a normal
speed.
Flicking the accelerator at the mo-
ment of switching off the ignition
could cause serious damage.
59
IV
A C C E S S
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the ve-
hicle battery, replacement of the re-
mote control battery or in the event
of a remote control malfunction, you
can no longer unlock, lock or locate
your vehicle.
First of all, use the key in the lock
to unlock or lock your vehicle.
Then, reinitialise the remote con-
trol.
If the problem persists, contact a
CITROËN dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
Reinitialisation
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the key to position 2
(Ignition on) .
Press the closed padlock imme-
diately for a few seconds.
Switch off the ignition and re-
move the key from the ignition
switch.
The remote control is fully opera-
tional again.
Battery ref.: CR0523/3 volts.
This replacement battery is avail-
able from CITROËN dealers.
If the remote control
battery is fl at, you are
informed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an
audible signal and a message on
the multifunction screen.
Unclip the casing using a coin at
the notch.
Slide the fl at battery out of its
location.
Slide the new battery into its
location observing the original
direction.
Clip the casing together.
Reinitialise the remote control.
Changing the battery
60
IV
A C C E S S
Lost keys
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehi-
cle's V5 registration document and your
personal identifi cation documents.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to
retrieve the key code and the transpon-
der code required to order a replace-
ment key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is
a sensitive system; do not operate it
while it is in your pocket as there is a
possibility that it may unlock the ve-
hicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons
of your remote control out of range
and out of sight of your vehicle. You
run the risk of stopping it from wor-
king and the remote control would
have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate
when the key is in the ignition, even
when the ignition is switched off, ex-
cept for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may
make access to the passenger com-
partment by the emergency services
more diffi cult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children
on board), remove the key from the
ignition when you leave the vehicle,
even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifi cations to
the electronic engine immobiliser
system; this could cause malfunc-
tions.
When purchasing a second-
hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a
CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only
ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote
control batteries away, they
contain metals which are
harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
57
IV
A C C E S S
Deadlocking using the key
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual cen-
tral control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
First press button A to fold the
key.
Locating your vehicle
Press the closed padlock to lo-
cate your locked vehicle in a car
park.
This is indicated by lighting of the
courtesy lamps and fl ashing of the di-
rection indicators for a few seconds.
Guide-me-home lighting
In order to activate this function from
the remote control, the lighting stalk
must be in the "O" (lighting off) or
"AUTO" position.
A press on button B operates the
guide-me-home lighting (lighting
of the sidelamps and dipped beam
headlamps for approximately one
minute).
A second press before the end of
the timed period cancels the guide-
me-home lighting.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip
which has a special code. When the
ignition is switched on, this code
must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser
locks the engine management sys-
tem a few minutes after the ignition
is switched off and prevents starting
of the engine by anyone who does
not have the key.
In the event of a mal-
function, you are in-
formed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an
audible signal and a
message on the multi-
function screen.
In this case, your vehicle does not
start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
soon as possible.
Folding the key
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Press the closed pad-
lock to lock the vehicle
completely or press the
closed padlock for more
than two seconds to
close the windows au-
tomatically in addition
to locking (according to
version).
Press the closed padlock again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the
vehicle completely and hold it
in this position for more than
two seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in addition to
locking (according to version).
Turn the key to the right again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confi rmed by fi xed
lighting of the direction indicators for
approximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
60
IV
A C C E S S
Lost keys
Visit a CITROËN dealer with the vehi-
cle's V5 registration document and your
personal identifi cation documents.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to
retrieve the key code and the transpon-
der code required to order a replace-
ment key.
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is
a sensitive system; do not operate it
while it is in your pocket as there is a
possibility that it may unlock the ve-
hicle, without you being aware of it.
Do not repeatedly press the buttons
of your remote control out of range
and out of sight of your vehicle. You
run the risk of stopping it from wor-
king and the remote control would
have to be reinitialised.
The remote control does not operate
when the key is in the ignition, even
when the ignition is switched off, ex-
cept for reinitialisation.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may
make access to the passenger com-
partment by the emergency services
more diffi cult in an emergency.
As a safety precaution (with children
on board), remove the key from the
ignition when you leave the vehicle,
even for a short time.
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifi cations to
the electronic engine immobiliser
system; this could cause malfunc-
tions.
When purchasing a second-
hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a
CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the
keys in your possession are the only
ones which can start the vehicle.
Do not throw the remote
control batteries away, they
contain metals which are
harmful to the environment.
Take them to an approved collection
point.
57
IV
A C C E S S
Deadlocking using the key
Deadlocking renders the exterior and
interior door controls inoperative.
It also deactivates the manual cen-
tral control button.
Therefore, never leave anyone in-
side the vehicle when it is dead-
locked.
First press button A to fold the
key.
Locating your vehicle
Press the closed padlock to lo-
cate your locked vehicle in a car
park.
This is indicated by lighting of the
courtesy lamps and fl ashing of the di-
rection indicators for a few seconds.
Guide-me-home lighting
In order to activate this function from
the remote control, the lighting stalk
must be in the "O" (lighting off) or
"AUTO" position.
A press on button B operates the
guide-me-home lighting (lighting
of the sidelamps and dipped beam
headlamps for approximately one
minute).
A second press before the end of
the timed period cancels the guide-
me-home lighting.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip
which has a special code. When the
ignition is switched on, this code
must be recognised in order for
starting to be possible.
This electronic engine immobiliser
locks the engine management sys-
tem a few minutes after the ignition
is switched off and prevents starting
of the engine by anyone who does
not have the key.
In the event of a mal-
function, you are in-
formed by lighting of
this warning lamp, an
audible signal and a
message on the multi-
function screen.
In this case, your vehicle does not
start; contact a CITROËN dealer as
soon as possible.
Folding the key
Deadlocking using the remote
control
Press the closed pad-
lock to lock the vehicle
completely or press the
closed padlock for more
than two seconds to
close the windows au-
tomatically in addition
to locking (according to
version).
Press the closed padlock again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Turn the key to the right in the
driver's door lock to lock the
vehicle completely and hold it
in this position for more than
two seconds to close the win-
dows automatically in addition to
locking (according to version).
Turn the key to the right again
within fi ve seconds to deadlock
the vehicle.
Deadlocking is confi rmed by fi xed
lighting of the direction indicators for
approximately two seconds.
According to version, the door mirrors
fold at the same time.
58
IV
A C C E S S
STARTING
1. "S": Steering lock
To unlock the steering, gently move
the steering wheel while turning the
key, without forcing it.
2. "M": Drive position
Depending on the version of your
vehicle, the orange and red war-
ning lamps should also come on for
a short time.
3. "D": Starter
Release the key as soon the engine
has started.
If the fi rst attempt fails, switch off the
ignition. Wait ten seconds then ope-
rate the starter again.
Steering lock
1. " S": After removing the key, turn
the steering wheel to lock the steer-
ing. The key can only be removed in
position S .
2. "M": Ignition switched on, the
steering is unlocked (by turning the
key to position M , move the steering
wheel gently if necessary).
3. "D": Starter position.
Never turn the key to this position
when the engine is running.
Key in ignition audible
warning
If you forget to remove the key from
the ignition, there is an audible
warning when the driver’s door is
opened.
Do not run the engine in an en-
closed space or where there is
insuffi cient ventilation.
It is essential always to keep
the engine running in order to
retain braking and steering as-
sistance .
Never remove the ignition key
before the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Vehicles equipped with a
turbocharger
Never stop the engine without having
allowed it to run for a few seconds at
idle, this being the time required for
the turbocharger to return to a normal
speed.
Flicking the accelerator at the mo-
ment of switching off the ignition
could cause serious damage.
61
IV
A C C E S S
ALARM
System which protects and provides
a deterrent against the theft of your
vehicle. It provides two types of pro-
tection, exterior and interior, as well
as a self-protection function.
Exterior perimeter protection
The system detects opening of the
vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to enter the vehicle by forcing a door,
the boot or the bonnet.
Interior volumetric protection
The system detects any variation in the
volume in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks
a window or moves inside the vehicle.
If you wish to leave a pet in the vehicle
or a window partially open, deactivate
the interior volumetric protection.
Self-protection function
The system detects the putting out
of service of its components.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries
to put the wires of the siren, the central
control or the battery out of service.
Do not make any modifi cations to
the alarm system, this could cause
malfunctions.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm
Activation
Switch off the ignition and get out
of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
the locking button on the remote
control.
The alarm is activated; the indicator
lamp on button A fl ashes once per
second.
The exterior perimeter protection is
activated, 5 seconds after the loc-
king button on the remote control is
pressed.
Deactivation
Unlock the vehicle using the
unlocking button on the remote
control.
The alarm is deactivated; the indica-
tor lamp on button A switches off.
The interior volumetric protection is
activated, 45 seconds after the loc-
king button on the remote control is
pressed.
If an opening - door or boot - is not
closed fully, the vehicle is not locked,
but the exterior perimeter protection
will be activated after 45 seconds at
the same time as the interior volu-
metric protection.
62
IV
A C C E S S
Triggering of the alarm
If the indicator lamp on button A
fl ashes rapidly, this indicates that
the alarm was triggered during
your absence. When the ignition is
switched on, this fl ashing stops im-
mediately.
To avoid triggering the alarm when
washing your vehicle, lock it using
the key in the driver's door lock.
Failure of the remote control
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
Lock or deadlock the vehicle using
the key in the driver's door lock.
Automatic activation *
This is indicated by sounding of the
siren and fl ashing of the direction
indicators for approximately thir-
ty seconds.
After it has been triggered, both
types of protection are again opera-
tional.
If the alarm is triggered ten times in
succession, the eleventh time will
result in it becoming inactive.
Unlock the vehicle using the key
in the driver's door lock.
Open the door; the alarm is trig-
gered.
Switch on the ignition; the alarm
stops.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on,
lighting of the indicator lamp on
button A for ten seconds indicates
a siren fault.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer.
* According to country.
2 minutes after the last door or the
boot is closed, the alarm is activated
automatically.
To avoid triggering the alarm on
entering the vehicle, fi rst press
the unlocking button on the re-
mote control.
Locking the vehicle with exterior
perimeter protection only
Deactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Switch off the ignition.
Within ten seconds, press but-
ton A until the indicator lamp is lit
continuously.
Get out of the vehicle.
Lock or deadlock the vehicle
without delay using the locking
button on the remote control.
The exterior perimeter protection
alone remains activated; the indica-
tor lamp on button A fl ashes once
per second.
To be effective, this deactivation
must be carried out each time the
ignition is switched off.
Reactivation of the interior
volumetric protection
Unlock the vehicle using the
unlocking button on the remote
control.
Relock the vehicle using the re-
mote control.
The alarm is activated again with
both types of protection; the indica-
tor lamp on button A fl ashes once
per second.
63
IV
A C C E S S
ELECTRIC WINDOWS
System intended to open or close a
window manually or automatically.
Fitted with a safety anti-pinch sys-
tem and a deactivation system for
the prevention of misuse of the rear
controls.
1.
Front left electric window control.
2.
Front right electric window control.
3.
Rear right electric window control.
4.
Rear left electric window control.
5. Deactivation of the rear elec-
tric window controls
or
Deactivation of the rear electric
window and door controls * .
One-touch electric windows
There are two options:
- manual mode
Press or pull the control gently.
The window stops when the
control is released.
- automatic mode
Press or pull the control fi rmly.
The window opens or closes
fully when the control is re-
leased.
Pressing the control again
stops the movement of the
window.
The electric window controls re-
main operational for approximate-
ly 45 seconds after the ignition is
switched off or until the vehicle is
locked after a door is opened.
If one of the passenger windows
cannot be operated from the driv-
er’s door control panel, carry out
the operation from the control for
the passenger door concerned.
Safety anti-pinch
When the window rises and meets
an obstacle, it stops and partially
lowers again.
If the window cannot be closed (for
example, in the presence of ice),
immediately after the movement is
reversed:
press and hold the control until
the window opens fully,
then pull the control immediate-
ly and hold it until the window
closes,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after
the window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function
is not operational during these
operations.
* Depending on version.
64
IV
A C C E S S
Reinitialisation
If a window does not rise automati-
cally, its operation must be reini-
tialised:
pull the control until the window
stops,
release the control and pull it
again until the window closes
fully,
continue to hold the control for
approximately one second after
the window has closed,
press the control to lower the
window automatically to the low
position,
when the window has reached the
low position, press the control again
for approximately one second.
The safety anti-pinch function is not
operational during these operations.
Deactivation of the rear
electric window controls
or
Deactivation of the rear
electric window and door
controls *
For the safety of your children,
press control 5 to deactivate the
rear electric window controls re-
gardless of their position.
If an obstacle is encountered during
operation of the electric windows,
you must reverse the movement of
the window. To do this, press the
control concerned.
When the driver operates the con-
trols for the passengers’ electric
windows, they must ensure that no
one is preventing correct closing of
the windows.
The driver must ensure that pas-
sengers use the electric windows
correctly.
Be aware of children when operating
the windows.
This control also deactivates the in-
terior controls of the rear doors (see
"Child safety - § Electric child lock").
* Depending on version.
Always remove the key from the ig-
nition when leaving the vehicle, even
for a short time.
This indicator lamp in the in-
strument panel comes on
temporarily when deactivating
and every time the ignition is
switched on.
65
IV
A C C E S S
DOORS
Opening
From outside
When the selective unlocking is acti-
vated, the fi rst press of the remote
control unlocking button permits
unlocking of the driver’s door only.
Pull on the front door control to
open the door; this unlocks the
vehicle completely.
Pull on the rear door control to
open the door; this unlocks the
door concerned only.
With the selective unlocking acti-
vated:
- the driver’s door control unlocks
the driver’s door only.
- the other door controls unlock
the other doors and the boot.
The interior door controls do not
operate when the vehicle is dead-
locked.
Central manual control
System which provides full manual
locking or unlocking of the doors
and boot from the inside.
Locking
Press button A to lock the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
If one of the doors is open, the cen-
tral locking from the inside does not
take place.
If the boot is open, the central loc-
king from the inside is active for the
doors, to permit the transportation
of long objects.
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control
or the key, pull the door handle.
From inside
66
IV
A C C E S S
Unlocking
Press button A again to unlock
the vehicle.
The red indicator lamp on the button
switches off.
If the vehicle is locked or dead-
locked from the outside, the red in-
dicator lamp fl ashes and button A
is inactive.
In this case, use the remote
control or the key to unlock the
vehicle.
Central automatic control
Locking
When the speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the doors and boot lock
automatically.
If one of the doors is open, the auto-
matic central locking does not take
place.
If the boot is open, the automatic central
locking of the doors is active.
Unlocking
Above 6 mph (10 km/h), press
button A to unlock the doors and
boot temporarily.
Activation
Press button A for more than
two seconds.
A confi rmation message appears on
the multifunction screen.
Deactivation
Press button A again for more
than two seconds.
A confi rmation message appears on
the multifunction screen.
Emergency control
System which locks or unlocks the
doors mechanically in the event of
a malfunction of the battery or of the
central locking.
Locking the driver’s door
Insert the key in the lock, then
turn it to the right.
Locking the front and rear
passenger doors
Insert the key in the lock, located
on the edge of the door, then turn
it one eighth of a turn .
System which provides full automatic
locking or unlocking of the doors and
boot while driving.
You can activate or deactivate this
function.
Unlocking the driver’s door
Insert the key in the lock, then
turn it to the left.
Unlocking the front and rear
passenger doors
Pull the interior door opening
control.
67
IV
A C C E S S
BOOT
After unlocking the vehicle com-
pletely using the remote control
or the key, push upwards on the
lever 1 , located between the
number plate lamps, then raise
the tailgate.
Lower the tailgate using one of
the two handholds 2 , located on
the inside of the tailgate.
Push at the end of travel.
- when the engine is
running , this warning
lamp comes on, accom-
panied by a message on
the multifunction screen
for a few seconds,
- when the vehicle is moving
(speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)),
this warning lamp comes on, ac-
companied by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunc-
tion screen for a few seconds.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly:
Opening Closing
Emergency boot release
System for mechanical unlocking of
the boot in the event of a battery or
central locking malfunction.
Unlocking
Fold back the rear seats to gain
access to the lock from inside
the boot.
Insert a small screwdriver into
hole A of the lock to unlock the
tailgate.
Push the white part, located in-
side the lock, to the left to unlock
the boot.
68
IV
A C C E S S
Refuelling
A label on the inside of the fl ap re-
minds you of the type of fuel to be
used for your engine.
More than 5 litres of fuel must be
added in order to be registered by
the fuel gauge.
The key cannot be removed from
the lock until the cap is put back on
the tank.
Opening the cap may cause an in-
rush of air. This vacuum, which is
perfectly normal, is caused by the
sealing of the fuel system.
Petrol vehicles: the fi ller neck has a
narrower orifi ce to admit only petrol
fi ller nozzles.
Capacity of the tank: approximately
60 litres.
Low fuel level
When the minimum level
in the fuel tank is reached,
this warning lamp in the in-
strument panel comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction
screen. When it fi rst comes on, you
have approximately 6 litres of fuel
remaining in the tank.
You must refuel to avoid running out
of fuel.
If you run out of fuel (Diesel), refer to
the "Checks" section also.
Fuel cut-off switch
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety
device which cuts off the fuel supply in
the event of a collision.
To fi ll the tank safely:
you must switch off the en-
gine,
open the fuel fi ller fl ap,
insert the key in the fuel tank cap
then turn it to the left,
fi ll the tank, but do not continue
after the 3rd cut-off of the nozzle ;
this could cause malfunctions.
When the tank is full:
put the cap back in place,
turn the key to the right, then re-
move it from the cap,
close the fl ap.
69
IV
A C C E S S
Quality of the fuel used for
petrol engines
The petrol engines are perfectly
compatible with E10 type petrol
biofuels (containing 10 % ethanol),
conforming to European standards
EN 228 and EN 15376.
E85 type fuels (containing up to 85 %
ethanol) are reserved exclusively for
vehicles marketed for the use of this
type of fuel (BioFlex vehicles). The
quality of the ethanol must comply
with European standard EN 15293.
For Brazil only, special vehicles are
marketed to run on fuels containing
up to 100 % ethanol (E100 type).
Quality of the fuel used for
Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are perfectly
compatible with biofuels which con-
form to current and future European
standards (Diesel fuel which com-
plies with standard EN 590 mixed
with a biofuel which complies with
standard EN 14214) available at the
pumps (containing up to 7 % Fatty
Acid Methyl Ester).
The B30 biofuel can be used in cer-
tain Diesel engines; however, this
use is subject to strict application
of the special servicing conditions.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
The use of any other type of
(bio)fuel (vegetable or animal oils,
pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is
strictly prohibited (risk of damage to
the engine and fuel system).
Special features of BioFlex
engines
A BioFlex vehicle has been designed
to run on unleaded petrol (RON 95
or RON 98) or ethanol (this is a mix-
ture containing 85 % ethanol and
15 % unleaded petrol, called E85).
So, regardless of the quantity of fuel
remaining in your tank and irrespec-
tive of its type (RON 95/RON 98,
E85 or a mixture of the two), you
can fi ll your tank at any time with un-
leaded petrol (RON 95 or RON 98)
or ethanol (E85).
There is no problem driving on un-
leaded petrol only with this vehicle.
In winter conditions, starting the
engine from cold may sometimes
prove diffi cult. During these very
cold periods you are advised to
use unleaded petrol rather than
E85 to ensure optimum starting
conditions.
70
V I S I B I L I T Y
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
CONTROLS
Control stalk for the selection and
control of the various front and rear
lamps providing the vehicle’s ligh-
ting.
Main lighting
The various front and rear lamps of
the vehicle are designed to adapt
the driver’s visibility progressively in
relation to the climatic conditions:
- sidelamps, to be seen,
- dipped beam headlamps to see
without dazzling other drivers,
- main beam headlamps to see
clearly when the road is clear.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are fi tted to fulfi l the
requirements of particular driving
conditions:
- a rear foglamp to be seen from a
distance,
- front foglamps for even better
forward vision,
- directional headlamps for im-
proved visibility when cornering,
- daytime running lamps to be
seen during the day.
Programming
Various automatic lighting control
modes are also available depending
on options:
- guide-me-home lighting,
- automatic illumination of head-
lamps,
- directional lighting.
Manual controls
Lamps off.
Automatic illumination of
headlamps.
Sidelamps only.
Dipped headlamps or main
beam headlamps.
B. Stalk for switching headlamps:
pull to switch the lighting be-
tween dipped headlamps/main
beam headlamps.
In the lamps off and sidelamps
modes, the driver can switch on the
main beam headlamps temporarily
("headlamp fl ash") by maintaining a
pull on the stalk.
Displays
Lighting of the corresponding indi-
cator lamp on the instrument panel
confi rms the switching on of the
lighting selected.
The lighting commands are issued
directly by the driver by means of
the ring A and the stalk B .
A. Main lighting mode selection
ring: turn it to position the symbol
required facing the mark.
71
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
C. Foglamps selection ring.
The foglamps operate with the side-
lamps and the dipped and main
beam headlamps.
- 1 st turn forwards: rear foglamp on.
-
1 st turn rearwards: rear foglamp off.
-
1 st turn forwards: front foglamps on.
-
2 nd turn forwards: rear foglamps on.
-
1 st turn rearwards: rear foglamps off.
-
2 nd turn rearwards: front foglamps off.
Model with rear foglamp only
Model with front and rear
foglamps
In good or rainy weather, both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear
foglamp are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may
dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or snow.
In these weather conditions, it is your responsibility to switch on the foglamps
and dipped beam headlamps manually as the brightness sensor may detect
suffi cient light.
Do not forget to switch off the front foglamps and the rear foglamp when they
are no longer necessary.
Switching off of the lamps when
the ignition is switched off
On switching off the ignition, all of the
lamps turn off immediately, except
for dipped beam if guide-me-home
lighting is activated.
Switching on the lamps after
the ignition is switched off
To reactivate the lighting control, ro-
tate ring A to the "0" position - lamps
off, then to the desired position.
On opening the driver’s door a
temporary audible signal warns the
driver that the lighting is on.
The lamps, with the exception of
the sidelamps, switch off automati-
cally after a maximum duration of
thirty minutes to prevent dischar-
ging of the battery.
In some weather conditions (e.g.
low temperature or humidity), the
presence of misting on the internal
surface of the glass of the head-
lamps and rear lamps is normal;
it disappears after the lamps have
been on for a few minutes.
72
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
* According to country.
Daytime-running lamps *
System which switches on the ve-
hicle’s dipped headlamps automati-
cally on starting.
This safety system makes the vehi-
cle more visible to other road users
during the day.
The lighting of the instruments and
controls (instrument panel, multi-
function screen, air conditioning
control panel, ...) is independent of
this function. It is provided by the
automatic lighting mode or when the
lamps are switched on manually.
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
The temporary lighting of dipped
headlamps after the vehicle’s igni-
tion has been switched off makes
the driver’s exit easier when the light
is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "fl ash" the
headlamps using the lighting
stalk B .
A second "headlamp fl ash"
switches the function off again.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting
switches off automatically after a set
time.
The manual guide-me-home ligh-
ting is also available by pressing the
lighting button on the remote con-
trol (refer to the section "Access -
§ Remote control key").
In countries in which it is imposed by
regulations:
- by default, this function is acti-
vated,
- the sidelamps and the number
plate lamps are also switched on.
73
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver, when a low
level of external light is detected or in certain
cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a suf-
fi cient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" posi-
tion. The automatic illumination
of headlamps is accompanied by
a message on the multifunction
screen.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other
than "AUTO" . Deactivation is
accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
Linking with the automatic
Guide-me-home lighting
Association with the automatic illu-
mination of headlamps provides the
guide-me-home lighting with the fol-
lowing additional options:
- selection of the lighting duration
to 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the
vehicle parameters on the mul-
tifunction screen confi guration
menu (in the case of the mono-
chrome screen A, the duration is
fi xed),
- automatic activation of guide-
me-home lighting when auto-
matic illumination of headlamps
is in operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lamps comes
on, a message appears on the multi-
function screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sen-
sor may detect suffi cient light.
Therefore, the lighting will not
come on automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sen-
sor, linked with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror;
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
THE HEADLAMPS
To avoid dazzling other road users,
the height of the halogen bulb head-
lamps must be adjusted according
to the load in the vehicle.
To do this, turn the control, located
below the fascia to the right of the
driver, to the appropriate position:
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised
loads.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised
loads.
The initial setting is position "0" .
On vehicles fi tted with xenon bulbs
the height of the headlamps is ad-
justed automatically.
72
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
* According to country.
Daytime-running lamps *
System which switches on the ve-
hicle’s dipped headlamps automati-
cally on starting.
This safety system makes the vehi-
cle more visible to other road users
during the day.
The lighting of the instruments and
controls (instrument panel, multi-
function screen, air conditioning
control panel, ...) is independent of
this function. It is provided by the
automatic lighting mode or when the
lamps are switched on manually.
Manual guide-me-home
lighting
The temporary lighting of dipped
headlamps after the vehicle’s igni-
tion has been switched off makes
the driver’s exit easier when the light
is poor.
Switching on
With the ignition off, "fl ash" the
headlamps using the lighting
stalk B .
A second "headlamp fl ash"
switches the function off again.
Switching off
The manual guide-me-home lighting
switches off automatically after a set
time.
The manual guide-me-home ligh-
ting is also available by pressing the
lighting button on the remote con-
trol (refer to the section "Access -
§ Remote control key").
In countries in which it is imposed by
regulations:
- by default, this function is acti-
vated,
- the sidelamps and the number
plate lamps are also switched on.
73
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
Automatic illumination of
headlamps
The sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps
are switched on automatically, without any
action on the part of the driver, when a low
level of external light is detected or in certain
cases of activation of the windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a suf-
fi cient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Activation
Turn ring A to the "AUTO" posi-
tion. The automatic illumination
of headlamps is accompanied by
a message on the multifunction
screen.
Deactivation
Turn ring A to a position other
than "AUTO" . Deactivation is
accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
Linking with the automatic
Guide-me-home lighting
Association with the automatic illu-
mination of headlamps provides the
guide-me-home lighting with the fol-
lowing additional options:
- selection of the lighting duration
to 15, 30 or 60 seconds in the
vehicle parameters on the mul-
tifunction screen confi guration
menu (in the case of the mono-
chrome screen A, the duration is
fi xed),
- automatic activation of guide-
me-home lighting when auto-
matic illumination of headlamps
is in operation.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the
sunshine sensor, the lamps comes
on, a message appears on the multi-
function screen, accompanied by an
audible signal.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sen-
sor may detect suffi cient light.
Therefore, the lighting will not
come on automatically.
Do not cover the sunshine sen-
sor, linked with the rain sensor and
located in the centre of the wind-
screen behind the rear view mirror;
the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT OF
THE HEADLAMPS
To avoid dazzling other road users,
the height of the halogen bulb head-
lamps must be adjusted according
to the load in the vehicle.
To do this, turn the control, located
below the fascia to the right of the
driver, to the appropriate position:
0. 1 or 2 people in the front seats.
-. 3 people.
1. 5 people.
-. Intermediate setting.
2. 5 people + maximum authorised
loads.
-. Intermediate setting.
3. Driver + maximum authorised
loads.
The initial setting is position "0" .
On vehicles fi tted with xenon bulbs
the height of the headlamps is ad-
justed automatically.
74
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
AUTOMATIC ADJUSTMENT
OF THE XENON HEADLAMPS
In order to avoid causing a nuisance
to other road users, this system cor-
rects the height of the xenon head-
lamps beam automatically and when
stationary, in relation to the load in
the vehicle.
If a malfunction occurs,
this warning lamp is
displayed on the instru-
ment panel, accom-
panied by an audible
signal and a message on the multi-
function screen.
The system then places your head-
lamps in the lowest position.
If a malfunction occurs, do not
touch the xenon bulbs. Consult a
CITROËN dealer.
When the dipped or main beam
headlamps are on, this function en-
ables the light beam to follow the
direction of the road.
The use of this function, coupled
with the xenon headlamps only,
considerably improves the quality of
your lighting when cornering.
with directional lighting
without directional lighting
Programming
The function is activa-
ted or deactivated via
the multifunction screen
confi guration menu.
Operating fault
If a malfunction occurs, this
warning lamp fl ashes on the
instrument panel, accompa-
nied by a message on the
multifunction screen.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
When stationary or moving at very
low speed or when reverse gear is
engaged, the system is inactive.
The status of the system remains
in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
On vehicles fi tted with daytime run-
ning lamps, the function is activated if
the lighting stalk is in the "AUTO" or
"Dipped/main beam headlamps"
position. In position "0" , the function
is not activated.
75
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
WIPER CONTROLS
System for selection and control of
the various front and rear wiping
modes for the elimination of rain and
cleaning.
The vehicle’s front and rear wipers
are designed to improve the driver’s
visibility progressively according to
the climatic conditions.
Programming
Various automatic wiper control
modes are also available according
to the following options:
- automatic rain sensitive wind-
screen wipers,
- rear wiping on engaging reverse
gear.
Manual controls
The wiper commands are issued di-
rectly by the driver by means of the
stalk A and the ring B .
Rear wiper
B. Rear wiper selection ring:
park,
intermittent wipe,
wash-wipe (set duration).
fast (heavy rain),
normal (moderate rain),
intermittent (proportional to
the speed of the vehicle),
automatic, then single
wipe (see following
page).
park,
single wipe
(press downwards),
Windscreen wipers
A. Wiping speed selection stalk:
or
If a signifi cant accumulation of snow
or ice is present, or when using a
tailgate bicycle carrier, deactivate
the automatic rear wiper via the
multifunction screen confi guration
menu.
76
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the
rear wiper will come into operation if
the windscreen wipers are operating.
Programming
The function is activat-
ed or deactivated via
the multifunction screen
confi guration menu.
This function is activated
by default.
Windscreen and headlamp
wash
Pull the windscreen wiper stalk
towards you. The windscreen
wash then the windscreen wipers
operate for a fi xed period.
If the dipped headlamps are on ,
the headlamp washers operate at
the same time.
Automatic rain sensitive
windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate au-
tomatically, without any action on the
part of the driver, if rain is detected
(sensor behind the rear view mirror),
adapting their speed to the intensity
of the rainfall.
Activation
This is controlled manually by the
driver by pushing the stalk down-
wards to the "AUTO" position.
It is accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
Switching off
This is controlled manually by the
driver by moving the stalk upwards
then returning it to position "0" .
It is accompanied by a message on
the multifunction screen.
The automatic rain sensitive wipers
must be reactivated if the ignition has
been off for more than one minute, by
pushing the stalk downwards.
Operating fault
If an automatic wiping malfunction
occurs, the wipers will operate in in-
termittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked
with the sunshine sensor and locat-
ed in the centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror.
Switch off the automatic rain sensi-
tive wipers when using an automatic
car wash.
In winter, to avoid damaging the
wiper blades, it is advisable to wait
until the windscreen is completely
clear of ice before activating the
automatic rain sensitive wipers.
77
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
Special position of
the windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement
of the blades. It can also be useful,
in winter, to detach the blades from
the windscreen.
In the moment following switching
off of the ignition, any action on the
stalk positions the wipers vertically
on the windscreen.
To park the wipers after this has
been done, switch on the ignition
and operate the stalk.
For maintain the effectiveness of
the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using
soapy water,
- avoid using them to retain card-
board on the windscreen.
- replace them at the fi rst signs
of wear.
COURTESY LAMPS
Selection and control of the various
passenger compartment lamps.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
Front courtesy lamp
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
In "Permanent lighting" mode, the
duration of lighting varies accord-
ing to the circumstances:
- with the ignition off, approxi-
mately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, ap-
proximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unli-
mited.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door or the boot is
opened,
- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the remote control locking
button is activated, in order to lo-
cate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is
closed.
Map reading lamps
With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
77
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
Special position of
the windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the
windscreen wiper blades.
It is used for cleaning or replacement
of the blades. It can also be useful,
in winter, to detach the blades from
the windscreen.
In the moment following switching
off of the ignition, any action on the
stalk positions the wipers vertically
on the windscreen.
To park the wipers after this has
been done, switch on the ignition
and operate the stalk.
For maintain the effectiveness of
the "fl at-blade" wiper blades, it is
advisable to:
- handle them with care,
- clean them regularly using
soapy water,
- avoid using them to retain card-
board on the windscreen.
- replace them at the fi rst signs
of wear.
COURTESY LAMPS
Selection and control of the various
passenger compartment lamps.
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Map reading lamps
Front courtesy lamp
In this position, the courtesy
lamp comes on gradually:
Permanently off.
Permanent lighting.
In "Permanent lighting" mode, the
duration of lighting varies accord-
ing to the circumstances:
- with the ignition off, approxi-
mately ten minutes,
- in energy economy mode, ap-
proximately thirty seconds,
- with the engine running, unli-
mited.
- when the vehicle is unlocked,
- when a door or the boot is
opened,
- when the key is removed from
the ignition,
- when the remote control locking
button is activated, in order to lo-
cate your vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
- when the vehicle is locked,
- when the ignition is switched on,
- 30 seconds after the last door is
closed.
Map reading lamps
With the ignition on, press the
corresponding switch.
78
V I S I B I L I T Y
V
This comes on automatically when
the boot is opened and switches
off automatically when the boot is
closed.
Different lighting times are avai-
lable:
- when the ignition is off, approxi-
mately ten minutes,
-
in energy economy mode, approxi-
mately thirty seconds,
- when the engine is running, no
limit.
The sill lighting is at the bottom of
each door panel.
The lamps come on automatically
when a door is opened and switch
off automatically when all of the
doors are closed.
Sill illumination
79
VI
F I T T I N G S
SUN VISOR
TOLL CARD/CAR PARK
TICKET WINDOWS
The athermic windscreen limits
heating of the passenger compart-
ment by reducing the effects of the
sun's rays (ultra-violet). It consists
of a refl ective layer, which also
blocks certain radio-electric signals
(toll card payments, ...).
Facility for affi xing toll cards and/or
car park tickets.
These windows are located on each
side of the base of the rear view mirror.
They are two non-refl ective areas of
the athermic windscreen.
With the ignition on, lift the fl ap;
the mirror is illuminated automat-
ically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold
the visor downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central
fi xing and pivoted over to the side
windows if required.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF
System which consists of an area of
panoramic tinted glass to increase
the light and visibility in the pas-
senger compartment. It is fi tted with
2 independent manual blinds to help
maintain a comfortable temperature.
Opening
Raise the blind's handle and re-
lease.
Each blind is fi tted with a roller which
stores it once you release it.
Closing
Front blind
Pull the blind rearwards until it
locks in.
Rear blind
Pull the blind forwards until it
locks in.
80
VI
F I T T I N G S
ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX
Its lid has areas for storing a pen, a
pair of spectacles, tokens, cards, a
cup, fragrance cartridges...
To open the glove box, raise the
handle and lower the lid.
COOLED GLOVE BOX
It may be cooled, depending on your
vehicle’s equipment, by a ventilation
duct that can be closed off manually.
With air conditioning, this duct dis-
tributes the same cooled air as the
vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
The cooling of your glove box only
operates when the engine is running
and the air conditioning is on.
The lamp comes on au-
tomatically when the lid is
opened.
For safety reasons, the
glove box should remain
closed when the vehicle is
moving.
81
VI
F I T T I N G S
REMOVABLE ASHTRAY
Pull the cover to open the ashtray.
To empty it, remove the ashtray
by pulling it upwards.
CIGAR LIGHTER/12 V
ACCESSORIES SOCKET
To use the cigar lighter, press it
in and wait a few seconds until it
pops out automatically.
To connect a 12 V accessory
(max power: 120 Watts), connect
a suitable adaptor to the socket
on the centre console.
Operates with the ignition on.
USB BOX
This connection box, consisting of an
auxiliary JACK socket and a USB port,
is located on the centre console.
It permits the connection of portable
equipment, such as a digital audio
player of the iPod
®
or USB memory
stick type.
It reads the audio fi le formats which are
transmitted to your audio equipment
and played via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these fi les using the
steering mounted controls or the audio
equipment control panel and display
them on the multifunction screen.
When it is in use, the portable equip-
ment charges automatically.
For more information on the use of
this equipment, refer to the "Audio
and Telematics" section.
82
VI
F I T T I N G S
Storage pockets in the front doors and rear panels
Storage pockets
STORAGE DRAWERS
To open
Press the front of the drawer.
To retrieve an object, lift the drawer
up using the aperture provided.
The storage drawers must not be
removed.
Flap
Press at the centre of the fl ap.
83
VI
F I T T I N G S
Oddments tray on front
central console
Grab handles/Coat hooks
MATS
Removable carpet protection com-
ponent.
Fitting
When fi tting the mat for the fi rst time,
on the driver's side, use only the fi xings
provided in the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as
possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the mat.
Refitting
To refi t the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refi t the fi xings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured
correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fi xings already present in the
vehicle; their use is essential,
- never fi t one mat on top of
another.
84
VI
F I T T I N G S
BAG HOOK
Located on the left-hand interior
wall of the boot, this can be used to
secure shopping bags.
REAR ARMREST
Comfort and storage device for the
rear passengers.
Lower the rear armrest for a
more comfortable position.
Raise the cover to gain access
to its storage compartment.
This has a storage tray, two cup
holders and two pen holders.
LUGGAGE SECURING RINGS
Use the 2 rear side fi xings and
the 4 securing rings on the boot
fl oor to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects on the fl oor as
close as possible to the back of the
rear seat.
79
VI
F I T T I N G S
SUN VISOR
TOLL CARD/CAR PARK
TICKET WINDOWS
The athermic windscreen limits
heating of the passenger compart-
ment by reducing the effects of the
sun's rays (ultra-violet). It consists
of a refl ective layer, which also
blocks certain radio-electric signals
(toll card payments, ...).
Facility for affi xing toll cards and/or
car park tickets.
These windows are located on each
side of the base of the rear view mirror.
They are two non-refl ective areas of
the athermic windscreen.
With the ignition on, lift the fl ap;
the mirror is illuminated automat-
ically.
To prevent dazzle from ahead, fold
the visor downwards.
It can be disengaged from its central
fi xing and pivoted over to the side
windows if required.
PANORAMIC SUNROOF
System which consists of an area of
panoramic tinted glass to increase
the light and visibility in the pas-
senger compartment. It is fi tted with
2 independent manual blinds to help
maintain a comfortable temperature.
Opening
Raise the blind's handle and re-
lease.
Each blind is fi tted with a roller which
stores it once you release it.
Closing
Front blind
Pull the blind rearwards until it
locks in.
Rear blind
Pull the blind forwards until it
locks in.
80
VI
F I T T I N G S
ILLUMINATED GLOVE BOX
Its lid has areas for storing a pen, a
pair of spectacles, tokens, cards, a
cup, fragrance cartridges...
To open the glove box, raise the
handle and lower the lid.
COOLED GLOVE BOX
It may be cooled, depending on your
vehicle’s equipment, by a ventilation
duct that can be closed off manually.
With air conditioning, this duct dis-
tributes the same cooled air as the
vents in the passenger compart-
ment.
The cooling of your glove box only
operates when the engine is running
and the air conditioning is on.
The lamp comes on au-
tomatically when the lid is
opened.
For safety reasons, the
glove box should remain
closed when the vehicle is
moving.
81
VI
F I T T I N G S
REMOVABLE ASHTRAY
Pull the cover to open the ashtray.
To empty it, remove the ashtray
by pulling it upwards.
CIGAR LIGHTER/12 V
ACCESSORIES SOCKET
To use the cigar lighter, press it
in and wait a few seconds until it
pops out automatically.
To connect a 12 V accessory
(max power: 120 Watts), connect
a suitable adaptor to the socket
on the centre console.
Operates with the ignition on.
USB BOX
This connection box, consisting of an
auxiliary JACK socket and a USB port,
is located on the centre console.
It permits the connection of portable
equipment, such as a digital audio
player of the iPod
®
or USB memory
stick type.
It reads the audio fi le formats which are
transmitted to your audio equipment
and played via the vehicle's speakers.
You can manage these fi les using the
steering mounted controls or the audio
equipment control panel and display
them on the multifunction screen.
When it is in use, the portable equip-
ment charges automatically.
For more information on the use of
this equipment, refer to the "Audio
and Telematics" section.
82
VI
F I T T I N G S
Storage pockets in the front doors and rear panels
Storage pockets
STORAGE DRAWERS
To open
Press the front of the drawer.
To retrieve an object, lift the drawer
up using the aperture provided.
The storage drawers must not be
removed.
Flap
Press at the centre of the fl ap.
83
VI
F I T T I N G S
Oddments tray on front
central console
Grab handles/Coat hooks
MATS
Removable carpet protection com-
ponent.
Fitting
When fi tting the mat for the fi rst time,
on the driver's side, use only the fi xings
provided in the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as
possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the mat.
Refitting
To refi t the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refi t the fi xings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured
correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fi xings already present in the
vehicle; their use is essential,
- never fi t one mat on top of
another.
83
VI
F I T T I N G S
Oddments tray on front
central console
Grab handles/Coat hooks
MATS
Removable carpet protection com-
ponent.
Fitting
When fi tting the mat for the fi rst time,
on the driver's side, use only the fi xings
provided in the wallet attached.
The other mats are simply placed on
the carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side:
move the seat as far back as
possible,
unclip the fi xings,
remove the mat.
Refitting
To refi t the mat on the driver's side:
position the mat correctly,
refi t the fi xings by pressing,
check that the mat is secured
correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the
pedals:
- only use mats which are suited to
the fi xings already present in the
vehicle; their use is essential,
- never fi t one mat on top of
another.
84
VI
F I T T I N G S
BAG HOOK
Located on the left-hand interior
wall of the boot, this can be used to
secure shopping bags.
REAR ARMREST
Comfort and storage device for the
rear passengers.
Lower the rear armrest for a
more comfortable position.
Raise the cover to gain access
to its storage compartment.
This has a storage tray, two cup
holders and two pen holders.
LUGGAGE SECURING RINGS
Use the 2 rear side fi xings and
the 4 securing rings on the boot
fl oor to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects on the fl oor as
close as possible to the back of the
rear seat.
84
VI
F I T T I N G S
BAG HOOK
Located on the left-hand interior
wall of the boot, this can be used to
secure shopping bags.
REAR ARMREST
Comfort and storage device for the
rear passengers.
Lower the rear armrest for a
more comfortable position.
Raise the cover to gain access
to its storage compartment.
This has a storage tray, two cup
holders and two pen holders.
LUGGAGE SECURING RINGS
Use the 2 rear side fi xings and
the 4 securing rings on the boot
fl oor to secure your luggage.
For safety reasons in the event of
sharp braking, you are advised to
place heavy objects on the fl oor as
close as possible to the back of the
rear seat.
85
VI
F I T T I N G S
REAR PARCEL SHELF
Rear parcel shelf
(3-door model)
To remove
Unhook the cords.
Raise slightly then pull, tilting
slightly to the side.
Offer up the rear parcel shelf
to its housings and push fi rmly
down.
Attach the cords to the tailgate,
so that the rear parcel shelf rises
on opening.
Rear parcel shelf
(5-door model)
To remove
Unhook the cords.
Raise slightly, then pull.
Installation
85
VI
F I T T I N G S
REAR PARCEL SHELF
Rear parcel shelf
(3-door model)
To remove
Unhook the cords.
Raise slightly then pull, tilting
slightly to the side.
Offer up the rear parcel shelf
to its housings and push fi rmly
down.
Attach the cords to the tailgate,
so that the rear parcel shelf rises
on opening.
Rear parcel shelf
(5-door model)
To remove
Unhook the cords.
Raise slightly, then pull.
Installation
86
VI
F I T T I N G S
LUGGAGE COVER
(C4 ENTERPRISE)
This conceals the interior of the ve-
hicle in combination with your rear
parcel shelf.
Installation Stowage
Roll up the luggage cover near
the rear seats.
Insert the fi xings A on the frame B
while unrolling the luggage cover.
Removal
Unhook all of the fi xings.
Lift the luggage cover on each
side.
Do not place hard or heavy objects
on the luggage cover.
They could become dangerous pro-
jectiles in the event of sudden brak-
ing or a collision.
87
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
* The rules for carrying children are
specifi c to each country. Refer to the
current legislation in your country.
GENERAL POINTS RELATING
TO CHILD SEATS
Although one of CITROËN's main
criteria when designing your vehicle,
the safety of your children also de-
pends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe
the following recommendations:
- in accordance with European
regulations, all children under
the age of 12 or less than one
and a half metres tall must
travel in approved child seats
suited to their weight , on seats
fi tted with a seat belt or ISOFIX
mountings * ,
- statistically, the safest seats in
your vehicle for carrying chil-
dren are the rear seats,
- a child weighing less than 9 kg
must travel in the "rearwards-
facing" position both in the
front and in the rear.
CITROËN recommends that chil-
dren should travel in the rear seats
of your vehicle:
- "rearwards-facing" up to the
age of 2,
- "forwards-facing" over the
age of 2.
CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
"Rearwards-facing"
When a "rearwards-facing" child
seat is installed on the front pas-
senger seat , it is essential that the
passenger airbag is deactivated.
Otherwise, the child would risk
being seriously injured or killed if
the airbag were to infl ate .
"Forwards-facing"
When a "forwards-facing" child seat
is installed on the front passenger
seat , adjust the vehicle's seat to the
intermediate longitudinal position
with the seat back upright and leave
the passenger airbag activated.
Intermediate longitudinal
position
88
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
Passenger airbag OFF
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN
CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three point seat belt :
Group 0: from birth to 10 kg
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER
Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the
rearwards-facing
position.
L2
"KIDDY Life"
The use of the
restraining cushion
is compulsory for
carrying young
children
(from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L3
"RECARO Start''
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age
of 6 years
(approximately
22 kg), the booster
is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fi tted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
88
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
Passenger airbag OFF
CHILD SEATS RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN
CITROËN offers a complete range of recommended child seats which are
secured using a three point seat belt :
Group 0: from birth to 10 kg
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 1, 2 and 3: from 9 to 36 kg
L1
"RÖMER
Baby-Safe Plus"
Installed in the
rearwards-facing
position.
L2
"KIDDY Life"
The use of the
restraining cushion
is compulsory for
carrying young
children
(from 9 to 18 kg).
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
L3
"RECARO Start''
L4
"KLIPPAN Optima"
From the age
of 6 years
(approximately
22 kg), the booster
is used on its own.
L5
"RÖMER KIDFIX"
Can be fi tted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
89
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS SECURED BY MEANS OF THE VEHICLE SEAT BELT
In accordance with European Regulations, this table tells you to what extent each of the seat positions in your vehicle
may take a child seat that is secured by means of the vehicle seat belt and approved as Universal (a) depending on the
weight of the child.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles by means of the vehicle seat belt.
(b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) It is essential to deactivate the front passenger’s airbag when a "rear facing" child seat is installed in the front passenger’s
seat position.
Consult the legislation currently in force in your country before placing your child in this seat position.
U: Seat suitable for the installation of a universal rear-facing child seat and a universal forward-facing child seat.
L-: Only the child seats indicated may be installed in the seat position concerned (depending on country).
X: Position not suitable for installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated.
Take care to comply with the fi tting instructions given in the child seat manufacturer’s user guide.
Seat
Weight of the child
Up to 10 kg and
Up to 13 kg
(groups 0 (b) and 0+)
9 - 18 kg
(group 1)
15 - 25 kg
(group 2)
22 - 36 kg
(group 3)
Front passenger
seat (c)
Fixed U U U U
Lateral rear seats U U U U
Central rear seat L1 X L3 L3
90
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
* According to country and current
local legislation.
ADVICE ON CHILD SEATS
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must
be positioned on the child's shoulder
without touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat
belt passes correctly over the child's
thighs.
CITROËN recommends the use of a
booster seat which has a back, fi t-
ted with a seat belt guide at shoulder
level.
As a safety precaution, do not
leave:
- one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle,
- a child or an animal in a vehicle
which is exposed to the sun, with
the windows closed,
- the keys within reach of children
inside the vehicle.
To prevent accidental opening of the
doors, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows
by more than one third.
To protect young children from the
rays of the sun, fi t side blinds on the
rear windows.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
When installing a child seat using the
seat belt, check that the seat belt is
tightened correctly on the child seat
and that it secures the child seat
fi rmly on the seat of your vehicle.
Remember to fasten the seat belts
or the child seat harnesses keeping
the slack in relation to the child's
body to a minimum, even for short
journeys.
For optimum installation of the "for-
wards-facing" child seat, ensure that
the back of the child seat is in con-
tact with the back of the vehicle's
seat and that the head restraint does
not cause any discomfort.
If the head restraint has to be re-
moved, ensure that it is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from
being thrown around the vehicle in
the event of sharp braking.
Children under the age of 10 must
not travel in the "forwards-facing"
position on the front passenger seat,
unless the rear seats are already oc-
cupied by other children, cannot be
used or are absent.
Deactivate the passenger airbag *
when a "rearwards-facing" child
seat is installed on the front seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk be-
ing seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were to infl ate.
91
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
"ISOFIX" MOUNTINGS
Your vehicle has been approved in
accordance with the new ISOFIX
regulation .
The outer rear seats of your vehicle
are fi tted with regulation ISOFIX
mountings.
The incorrect installation of a child
seat in a vehicle compromises the
child's protection in the event of an
accident.
For information regarding the op-
tions for installing ISOFIX child
seats in your vehicle, consult the
table summarising the locations for
ISOFIX child seats.
These are three rings for each seat:
- two rings A , located between the
vehicle seat back and cushion,
indicated by a label,
- a ring B , referred to as the TOP
TETHER , located in the boot be-
tween the wheel arch and the
seat back.
This ISOFIX mounting system guaran-
tees you fast, reliable and safe fi tting of
the child seat in your vehicle.
The ISOFIX child seats are fi tted
with two locks which are secured
easily on the two rings A .
Some also have an upper strap
which is attached to the ring B .
To attach this strap, remove the ve-
hicle seat's head restraint and the
cover at the top of the seat back.
Then fi x the hook on the ring B and
tighten the upper strap.
92
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
ISOFIX CHILD SEAT RECOMMENDED BY CITROËN AND APPROVED FOR YOUR VEHICLE
This child seat can also be used on seats which are not fi tted with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be attached
to the vehicle seat using the three point seat belt.
Follow the instructions for fi tting the child seat given in the seat manufacturer's installation guide.
RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category B1 )
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed in the forwards-facing position.
Fitted with an upper strap to be secured on the upper ring B ,
referred to as the TOP TETHER.
Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying.
93
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
* The ISOFIX shell is secured to the bottom rings on an ISOFIX position, occupying 2 rear seat positions.
** To install ISOFIX child seats type B1 , remove the head restraints from the seats.
TABLE SUMMARISING THE LOCATION OF ISOFIX CHILD SEATS
In compliance with European legislation, this table indicates which of the ISOFIX child seats can be installed in seat
positions in your vehicle that are equipped with ISOFIX anchoring points.
For ISOFIX universal and semi-universal child seats, the ISOFIX size class, defi ned by a letter from A to G , is shown on
the child seat to the right of the ISOFIX logo.
IUF : seat position suitable for installation of an I SOFIX U niversal " F orwards-facing" seat attached using the top belt.
IL-SU : seat position suitable for installation of an I SOFIX S emi- U niversal seat: ISOFIX "rearwards-facing" child seats
equipped with a top belt and ISOFIX "shell" child seats with a top belt.
Do not install ISOFIX child seats equipped with a bar.
Child weight/age given as a guide
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Up to approx.
6 months
Less than 10 kg
(group 0)
Less than 13 kg
(group 0+)
Up to approx.
1 year old
9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From 1 to 3 years approx.
Type of ISOFIX child seat Shell seat *
"Rearwards-facing" "Rearwards-facing"
"Forwards-facing"
ISOFIX size classes F G C D E C D A B B1 **
ISOFIX outer rear seats IL-SU IL-SU IL-SU IUF
94
VII
C H I L D S A F E T Y
MANUAL CHILD LOCK
Locking
Turn the red control one quarter
of a turn to the left using the igni-
tion key.
Unlocking
Turn the red control one quarter
of a turn to the right using the
ignition key.
ELECTRIC CHILD LOCK *
Mechanical system to prevent open-
ing of the rear door using its interior
control.
The control is located on the edge of
each rear door.
Remote control system to prevent
opening of the rear doors using their
interior controls and use of the rear
electric windows.
Activation
Press the button A .
Deactivation
Press the button A again.
This system is independent and in
no circumstances does it take the
place of the central locking control.
Check the status of the child lock
each time you switch on the ignition.
Always remove the key from the
ignition when leaving the vehicle,
even for a short time.
In the event of a serious impact,
the electric child lock is deactivated
automatically to permit the exit of
the rear passengers.
This warning lamp comes on tem-
porarily on the instrument panel
when the child lock is activated.
The control A is located on the driv-
er's door, with the electric window
controls.
* Depending on version.
It also comes on when the ignition
is switched on, then switches off ap-
proximately ten seconds after the
engine is started.
95
VIII
S A F E T Y
DIRECTION INDICATORS
Left: lower the lighting stalk be-
yond the point of resistance.
Right: raise the lighting stalk be-
yond the point of resistance.
HAZARD WARNING LAMPS
A visual warning by means of the di-
rection indicators to alert other road
users to a vehicle breakdown, towing
or accident.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency,
depending on the deceleration, the
hazard warning lamps come on au-
tomatically.
They switch off automatically the
fi rst time you accelerate.
You can also switch them off by
pressing the button.
Horn
Audible warning system to alert other
road users to an imminent danger.
Selection of the left or right direction
indicators to signal a change of di-
rection of the vehicle.
Press this button, the direction
indicators fl ash.
They can operate with the ignition
off.
Press at the lower part of the
fi xed centred controls steering
wheel.
Use the horn moderately and only
in the following circumstances:
- immediate danger,
- overtaking a cyclist or pedes-
trian
- approaching a location lacking
visibility.
96
VIII
S A F E T Y
TYRE UNDER-INFLATION
DETECTION
Sensors fi tted in each valve check
the tyre pressure during driving and
trigger a warning in the event of
malfunction (speed above 12 mph
(20 km/h)).
Under-infl ated tyre
The tyre under-infl ation detection
system is an aid to driving which
does not replace the vigilance or
responsibility of the driver.
Puncture
The service warning lamp
comes on in the instru-
ment panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and
a message on the multi-
function screen locating
the wheel concerned.
Check the tyre pressures as soon as
possible. This check must be carried
out when the tyres are cold.
The STOP warning lamp
comes on in the instru-
ment panel, accompanied
by an audible signal and
a message on the multi-
function screen locating
the wheel concerned.
Stop immediately, avoiding any sud-
den movement of the steering wheel
and the brakes.
Change the damaged wheel (punctured
or very defl ated tyre), and have the tyre
pressure checked as soon as possible.
Sensor(s) not detected or faulty
The service warning lamp
comes on in the instrument
panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a mes-
sage on the multifunction
screen locating the wheel
or wheels which are not detected or
indicating a fault in the system.
Have the faulty sensor(s) checked by
a CITROËN dealer.
All repairs and changing of tyres
on a wheel fi tted with this system
must be carried out by a CITROËN
dealer.
If, when changing a tyre, you in-
stall a wheel which is not detected
by your vehicle (example: fi tting
of snow tyres), you must have the
system reinitialised by a CITROËN
dealer.
This system does not avoid the
need to have the tyre pressures
checked regularly (refer to the
"Technical data - § Identifi cation
markings" section) to ensure that
the optimum dynamic perform-
ance of the vehicle is maintained
and prevent premature wear of the
tyres, particularly in arduous driv-
ing conditions (heavy load, high
speed).
The tyre pressures must be
checked cold, at least once a
month. Remember to check the
pressure of the spare wheel.
The tyre under-infl ation detection
system may experience temporary
interference due to electro-mag-
netic signals on a frequency close
to that used by the system.
This message is also displayed
when one of the wheels is away
from the vehicle (being repaired) or
when one or more wheels without a
sensor are fi tted.
The spare wheel is not fi tted with a
sensor.
97
VIII
S A F E T Y
BRAKING ASSISTANCE
SYSTEMS
Group of supplementary systems
which help you to obtain optimum
braking in complete safety in emer-
gency situations:
- anti-lock braking system (ABS),
- electronic brake force distribution
(EBFD),
- emergency braking assistance
(EBA).
Anti-lock braking system
and electronic brake force
distribution
Linked systems which improve the
stability and manoeuvrability of your
vehicle when braking, in particular
on poor or slippery surfaces.
Activation
The anti-lock braking system comes
into operation automatically when
there is a risk of wheel lock.
Normal operation of the ABS may
make itself felt by slight vibration of
the brake pedal.
Operating fault
When braking in an emergency,
press very fi rmly without releasing
the pressure.
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an au-
dible signal and a message
on the multifunction screen,
it indicates a malfunction of the anti-
lock braking system which could re-
sult in loss of control of the vehicle
when braking.
If this warning lamp comes
on, together with the STOP
and ABS warning lamps,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message on the multi-
function screen, it indicates a mal-
function of the electronic brake force
distribution which could result in loss
of control of the vehicle when braking.
You must stop as soon as it is
safe to do so.
In either case, contact a CITROËN
dealer.
When replacing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that they conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
Emergency braking assistance
System which, in an emergency,
enables you to obtain the optimum
braking pressure more quickly, thus
reducing the stopping distance.
Activation
It is triggered by the speed at which
the brake pedal is pressed.
The effect of this is a reduction in
the resistance of the pedal and an
increase in braking effi ciency.
When braking in an emergency,
press fi rmly without releasing the
pressure.
98
VIII
S A F E T Y
TRAJECTORY CONTROL
SYSTEMS
Anti-skid regulation (ASR)
and electronic stability
programme (ESP)
Activation
These systems are activated auto-
matically each time the vehicle is
started.
They come into operation in the event
of a grip or trajectory problem.
This is indicated by fl ashing
of this warning lamp on the
instrument panel.
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a
vehicle which is bogged down, stuck
in snow, on soft ground...), it may be
advisable to deactivate the ASR and
ESP systems, so that the wheels
can move freely and regain grip.
Press the "ESP OFF" button, lo-
cated in the centre of the dash-
board.
Reactivation
These systems are reactivated au-
tomatically each time the ignition is
switched back on or from 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Press the "ESP OFF" button again
to reactivate them manually.
If this warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel
and the indicator lamp on the
button comes on, this indi-
cates that the ASR and ESP
systems are deactivated.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes
on, accompanied by an au-
dible signal and a message
on the multifunction screen,
this indicates a malfunction of these
systems.
Have the systems checked by a
CITROËN dealer.
The ESP/ASR systems offer ex-
ceptional safety in normal driving,
but this should not encourage the
driver to take extra risks or drive at
high speed.
The correct functioning of these
systems depends on observation
of the manufacturer's recommen-
dations regarding the wheels (tyres
and rims), the braking components,
the electronic components and the
CITROËN assembly and operation
procedures.
After an impact, have these systems
checked by a CITROËN dealer.
The anti-skid regulation (also known
as Traction Control) optimises trac-
tion to prevent skidding of the wheels,
by acting on the brakes of the driving
wheels and on the engine.
The electronic stability programme acts
on the brake of one or more wheels
and on the engine to keep the vehicle
on the trajectory required by the driver,
within the limits of the laws of physics.
99
VIII
S A F E T Y
SEAT BELTS
Front seat belts
The front seat belts are fi tted with a
pretensioning system and force limiter.
This system improves safety in the front
seats in the event of a front impact.
Fastening
Pull the belt down in front of you
in a steady movement, making
sure that it does not become
twisted.
Press the fastening into its buckle.
Check that it is properly secured
and that the automatic locking
mechanism operates correctly
by pulling sharply on the belt
strap.
The abdominal part of the strap
should be positioned as low
down as possible in the lap and
as tight as possible.
The chest part should be posi-
tioned if possible in the channel
of the shoulder.
Each belt has a reel that adjusts its
length automatically to the girth of
the seat occupant.
Depending on the seriousness of the
impact, the pretensioning system in-
stantly tightens the seat belt against
the body of the occupant.
The pretensioning seat belts are
active when the ignition is on.
The force limiter reduces the pres-
sure of the seat belt against the
chest of the occupant, so increasing
their protection.
100
VIII
S A F E T Y
Storing the seat belt
(3-door model)
Raise then lock part A , to retain the
seat belt buckle when it is unfas-
tened.
It is necessary to remove the seat
belt from the buckle retainer before
moving the seat to access the rear
seat positions.
As a safety measure, these operations
should only be done when stationary.
Seat belt height adjustment
(5-door model)
Correct adjustment of the upper
mounting places the diagonal belt at
mid-shoulder level.
To adjust the belt, squeeze the
control and slide it in the direc-
tion required.
Unfastening
To unfasten the belt, press on
the red button in the buckle.
The belt retracts automatically when
not in use.
Rear seat belts
Each rear seat is fi tted with a three-
point inertia reel seat belt.
Fastening
Pull the strap, then insert the
tongue in the buckle.
Check that the seat belt is fas-
tened correctly by pulling the
strap.
Unfastening
Press the red button on the
buckle.
101
VIII
S A F E T Y
The driver must ensure that passen-
gers use the seat belts correctly and
that they are all restrained securely
before setting off.
Wherever you are seated in the ve-
hicle, always fasten your seat belt,
even for short journeys.
Do not invert the seat belt buckles
as they will not fulfi l their role fully.
The seat belts are fi tted with an in-
ertia reel permitting automatic ad-
justment of the length of the strap
to your size. The seat belt is stored
automatically when not in use.
Before and after use, ensure that the
seat belt is reeled in correctly.
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible on the
pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned
in the hollow of the shoulder.
The inertia reels are fi tted with an
automatic locking device which
comes into operation in the event
of a collision, emergency braking or
if the vehicle rolls over. You can re-
lease the device by pulling fi rmly on
the strap and releasing it so that it
re-winds slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt
must:
- be tightened as close to the body
as possible,
- be pulled in front of you with a
smooth movement, checking
that it does not twist,
- be used to restrain only one person,
-
not bear any trace of cuts or fraying,
- not be converted or modifi ed to
avoid affecting its performance.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the pas-
senger is less than 12 years old or
shorter than one and a half metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure
more than one person.
Never allow a child to travel on your
lap.
In accordance with current safety
regulations, all repairs and checks
must be carried out by a CITROËN
dealer who guarantees that the work
is carried out correctly.
Have your seat belts checked regu-
larly by a CITROËN dealer and par-
ticularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product,
sold by CITROËN dealers.
After folding or moving a seat or rear
bench seat, ensure that the seat belt
is positioned and reeled in correctly.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and se-
riousness of the impacts , the pre-
tensioning device may be triggered
before and independently of the
airbags. Triggering of the pre-ten-
sioners is accompanied by a slight
discharge of harmless smoke and
a noise, due to the activation of the
pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated
in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp
comes on.
Following an impact, have the seat
belts system checked, and if neces-
sary replaced, by a CITROËN dealer.
102
VIII
S A F E T Y
AIRBAGS
System designed to maximise the
safety of the occupants (with the
exception of the rear centre pas-
senger) in the event of violent col-
lisions. It supplements the action of
the force-limiting seat belts.
If a collision occurs, the electronic
detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in
the impact detection zones:
- in the case of a serious impact,
the airbags are triggered instant-
ly and protect the occupants of
the vehicle (with the exception of
the rear centre passenger); im-
mediately after the impact, the
airbags defl ate rapidly so that
they do not hinder visibility or the
exit of the occupants,
- in the case of a minor or rear
impact or in certain roll-over
conditions, the airbags will not
be triggered; the seat belt alone
is suffi cient to provide optimum
protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when
the ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only operate
once. If a second impact occurs
(during the same or a subsequent
accident), the airbag will not operate.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Triggering of the airbag(s) is ac-
companied by a slight emission of
harmless smoke and a noise, due to
the activation of the pyrotechnic car-
tridge incorporated in the system.
This smoke is not harmful, but sen-
sitive individuals may experience
slight irritation.
The noise of the detonation may
result in a slight loss of hearing for
a short time.
Front airbags
System which protects the head and
chest of the driver and front passenger
in the event of a front impact.
The driver's airbag is incorporated
in the centre of the steering wheel;
the front passenger's airbag is incor-
porated in the dashboard above the
glove box.
Activation
The airbags are triggered simultane-
ously, unless the passenger's front
airbag is deactivated, in the event of
a serious front impact applied to all
or part of the front impact zone A ,
in the longitudinal centreline of the
vehicle on a horizontal plane and di-
rected from the front to the rear of
the vehicle.
The front airbag infl ates between the
front occupant of the vehicle and the
dashboard to cushion their forward
movement.
103
VIII
S A F E T Y
Deactivation
This warning lamp comes on
on the instrument panel when
the ignition is on and until the
airbag is reactivated.
To ensure the safety of your child,
it is imperative that the passenger
airbag is deactivated when you in-
stall a "rearwards-facing" child seat
on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child would risk be-
ing seriously injured or killed if the
airbag were triggered.
Activation
When you remove the child seat,
turn switch 1 to the "ON" position to
reactivate the airbag and so ensure
the safety of your front passenger in
the event of an impact.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes
on on the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible
warning and a message on
the multifunction screen, contact a
CITROËN dealer to have the sys-
tem checked. The airbags may no
longer be triggered in the event of a
serious impact.
Only the front passenger's airbag
can be deactivated:
with the ignition off , insert the
key in the passenger airbag de-
activation switch 1 ,
turn it to the "OFF" position,
then, remove the key keeping
the switch in this position.
If this warning lamp fl ashes,
contact a CITROËN dealer.
If both airbag warning lamps come
on continuously, do not install a
"rearwards-facing" child seat on
the front passenger seat.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer.
105
VIII
S A F E T Y
For the airbags to be fully
effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering
wheel by its spokes or resting your
hands on the centre part of the
wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet
on the dashboard.
If possible, do not smoke as deploy-
ment of the airbags can cause burns
or the risk of injury from a cigarette
or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering
wheel or hit it violently.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the
seats. These will not hinder infl a-
tion of the lateral airbags. Consult a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not fi x or attach anything to the
seat backs (clothing...). This could
cause injury to the chest or arms if
the lateral airbag is triggered.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fi x or attach anything to the
roof. This could cause injury to the
head if the curtain airbag is trig-
gered.
Do not remove the grab handles in-
stalled on the roof, they play a part
in securing the curtain airbags.
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child,
pet, object...). This could hamper the
operation of the airbags or injure the
occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle
has been stolen or broken into, have
the airbag systems checked.
All work on the airbag system is
strictly forbidden unless it is carried
out by qualifi ed personnel of the
CITROËN dealer network.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is triggered
cannot be ruled out. The bag infl ates
almost instantly (within a few mil-
liseconds) then defl ates within the
same time discharging the hot gas
via openings provided for this pur-
pose.
104
VIII
S A F E T Y
* According to country.
Lateral airbags *
System which protects the driver
and front passenger in the event of
a serious side impact in order to limit
the risk of injury to the chest.
Each lateral airbag is fi tted in the
front seat back frame, on the door
side.
Operation
It is triggered unilaterally in the
event of a serious side impact ap-
plied to all or part of the side impact
zone B , perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal centreline of the vehicle on
a horizontal plane and directed from
the outside towards the inside of the
vehicle.
The lateral airbag infl ates between
the front occupant of the vehicle and
the corresponding door trim panel.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone.
B. Side impact zone.
Curtain airbags *
System which protects the driver
and passengers (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the
event of a serious side impact in or-
der to limit the risk of head injuries.
Each curtain airbag is incorporated
in the pillars and the upper part of
the passenger compartment.
Operation
It is triggered at the same time as
the corresponding lateral airbag in
the event of a serious side impact
applied to all or part of the side im-
pact zone B , perpendicular to the
longitudinal centreline of the vehicle
on a horizontal plane and directed
from the outside towards the inside
of the vehicle.
The curtain airbag infl ates between
the front or rear occupant of the ve-
hicle and the windows.
In the event of a minor impact or
bump on the side of the vehicle or
if the vehicle rolls over, the airbag
may not be triggered.
The airbag is not triggered in the
event of a rear or front collision.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes
on in the instrument panel,
accompanied by an audible
signal and a message on
the multifunction screen, contact a
CITROËN dealer to have the sys-
tem checked. The airbags may no
longer be triggered in the event of a
serious impact.
105
VIII
S A F E T Y
For the airbags to be fully
effective, observe the following
safety rules:
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering
wheel by its spokes or resting your
hands on the centre part of the
wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet
on the dashboard.
If possible, do not smoke as deploy-
ment of the airbags can cause burns
or the risk of injury from a cigarette
or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering
wheel or hit it violently.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the
seats. These will not hinder infl a-
tion of the lateral airbags. Consult a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not fi x or attach anything to the
seat backs (clothing...). This could
cause injury to the chest or arms if
the lateral airbag is triggered.
Do not sit with the upper part of the
body any nearer to the door than
necessary.
Curtain airbags
Do not fi x or attach anything to the
roof. This could cause injury to the
head if the curtain airbag is trig-
gered.
Do not remove the grab handles in-
stalled on the roof, they play a part
in securing the curtain airbags.
Sit in a normal upright position.
Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt.
Do not leave anything between the
occupants and the airbags (a child,
pet, object...). This could hamper the
operation of the airbags or injure the
occupants.
After an accident or if the vehicle
has been stolen or broken into, have
the airbag systems checked.
All work on the airbag system is
strictly forbidden unless it is carried
out by qualifi ed personnel of the
CITROËN dealer network.
Even if all of the precautions men-
tioned are observed, a risk of injury
or of minor burns to the head, chest
or arms when an airbag is triggered
cannot be ruled out. The bag infl ates
almost instantly (within a few mil-
liseconds) then defl ates within the
same time discharging the hot gas
via openings provided for this pur-
pose.
106
IX
D R I V I N G
PARKING BRAKE
Applying
Pull the parking brake lever fully
up to immobilise your vehicle.
Releasing
Pull the parking brake lever gently,
press the release button then lower
the lever fully.
When the vehicle is being driven,
if this warning lamp and the STOP
warning lamp come on, accompa-
nied by an audible signal and a mes-
sage on the multifunction screen,
this indicates that the parking brake
is still on or has not been properly
released.
When parking on a slope, direct
your wheels against the pavement,
apply the parking brake and engage
a gear.
5-SPEED MANUAL
GEARBOX
Starting the vehicle
Check that the gear lever is in
neutral.
Do not touch the accelerator.
For Diesel engines: turn the
key to position M and wait until
the pre-heating warning lamp
switches off if it has come on.
Operate the starter, turning the
key until the engine starts (no
more than ten seconds).
In temperatures lower than 0 °C,
declutch while operating the
starter to facilitate starting.
Engaging reverse gear
Push the gear lever to the
right then rearwards.
Only engage reverse gear when
the vehicle is stationary with the
engine at idle.
107
IX
D R I V I N G
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC
GEARBOX SYSTEM
The 6-speed electronic gearbox of-
fers a choice between the comfort of
fully automatic operation or the driving
pleasure of manual gear changing.
You have a choice of two driving
modes:
- the automatic mode for auto-
matic control of the gears by the
gearbox,
- the sequential mode for manual
changing of the gears by the driver.
6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX
Engaging reverse gear
Raise the ring under the knob
(indicated by the arrow) and
push the gear lever to the left
then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine
at idle.
Mode selection
automatic mode: selector 2 in
position A .
manual mode: selector 2 in posi-
tion M .
In automatic mode, instant manual
operation is possible any time you
action one of the paddles 1 .
As a safety precaution and to facili-
tate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
107
IX
D R I V I N G
6-SPEED ELECTRONIC
GEARBOX SYSTEM
The 6-speed electronic gearbox of-
fers a choice between the comfort of
fully automatic operation or the driving
pleasure of manual gear changing.
You have a choice of two driving
modes:
- the automatic mode for auto-
matic control of the gears by the
gearbox,
- the sequential mode for manual
changing of the gears by the driver.
6-SPEED MANUAL GEARBOX
Engaging reverse gear
Raise the ring under the knob
(indicated by the arrow) and
push the gear lever to the left
then forwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine
at idle.
Mode selection
automatic mode: selector 2 in
position A .
manual mode: selector 2 in posi-
tion M .
In automatic mode, instant manual
operation is possible any time you
action one of the paddles 1 .
As a safety precaution and to facili-
tate starting of the engine:
- always select neutral,
- press the clutch pedal.
108
IX
D R I V I N G
Displays on the instrument panel
- The selector position is displayed
in the instrument panel, on the left
on multifunction screens A and C
and on the right on the NaviDrive
multifunction screen.
- A back-lit position grille associ-
ated with the selector shows the
position selected.
Moving off
When the ignition is on, lighting of
the service warning lamp, accom-
panied by an audible signal and
the message "Gearbox faulty" in-
dicates a malfunction.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
For safety:
Position N can only be disen-
gaged if you are pressing the
brake pedal.
If the gearbox is in position N
but the selector position is diffe-
rent, reposition the selector on N
in order to be able to start.
To start the engine, the selector
must be in position N .
Press fi rmly on the brake pedal.
Operate the starter.
When the engine is running,
place the selector on R , A or M
as desired.
Check, in the instrument panel,
the position engaged.
Release the brake pedal and
accelerate.
If the selector is not in position N ,
and/or if the brake pedal is not
pressed, the corresponding warning
lamp(s) are displayed and a mes-
sage informs you that at least one of
these two conditions is not met.
In this case, the engine will not start,
recommence the above procedure.
Engaging reverse gear
To engage reverse gear, move the
selector to R .
Only attempt to select reverse gear
when the vehicle is stationary.
If the vehicle is moving rapidly, if an in-
advertent attempt to engage reverse
gear is made, the warning lamp N will
fl ash and your vehicle will go auto-
matically into neutral. To re-engage a
gear, you have only to reposition the
selector on A , M or R .
Reverse gear
109
IX
D R I V I N G
Neutral
Changing to neutral
To change to neutral, move the se-
lector to N . If the vehicle is moving,
do not select this position even mo-
mentarily.
Automatic mode
Changing to automatic mode
To change to automatic mode, move
the selector to A .
Manual mode
Changing to manual mode
Manual mode activates when you
move the selector to M .
Pull the paddle " + " to change up
a gear.
Pull the paddle " - " to change
down a gear.
When the engine is running, before
accelerating to move the vehicle,
make sure that the position engaged
on the selector grille or in the instru-
ment panel is either: R , A or M
Do not leave the vehicle with the
engine running in R , A or M .
110
IX
D R I V I N G
Temporary manual operation
when in automatic mode
By pulling either of the " + " or " - " pad-
dles, you can exercise temporary
control over gear changing.
The request to change gear will be
taken into account. You will still be in
automatic mode. The warning lamp A
remains lit up in the instrument panel.
This function enables you to antici-
pate certain situations such as the
approach of a bend or the need to
overtake another vehicle.
Move the selector to position A .
The warning lamp A lights up in
the instrument panel to confi rm
the selection.
The gearbox then functions in auto-
matic mode, without any action on
your part.
It constantly selects the gear that is
best suited to the following condi-
tions:
- driving style,
- road profi le,
- optimum fuel consumption.
Operation in automatic mode Cancellation of automatic
mode
The change from position A (driving in
automatic mode) to position M (driv-
ing in manual mode) or vice versa can
be made at any time. The warning
lamp A disappears in the instrument
panel.
111
IX
D R I V I N G
Operation in manual mode
Move the selector to position M .
Paddle controls behind the steering
wheel
The paddles behind the steering
wheel give you access to the six for-
ward gears.
- In manual mode, it is not neces-
sary to release the accelerator
completely during gear changes.
- A request to change gear is ac-
cepted only if the engine speed
permits it.
- For safety reasons, depending
on the engine speed, a change
down may be performed auto-
matically.
In situations of high engine speeds
(heavy acceleration), a change up
will not occur unless the driver ope-
rates the paddle.
Acceleration
For optimum acceleration (e.g. to
overtake another vehicle), simply
press the pedal beyond the point of
resistance at the end of its travel, by
pressing down fi rmly.
Vehicle stationary, with
the engine running
In the event of a prolonged stop with
the engine running, the gearbox
changes automatically to neutral N .
Stopping the vehicle
Before stopping the engine, you can
choose:
to leave the vehicle in neutral;
move the selector to position N .
to leave the vehicle with a gear
engaged ( R , A or M ); place the
selector in the chosen position
prior to stopping the engine. In
this case, the vehicle cannot be
moved.
In all cases, it is essential to apply
the parking brake. Check that the
parking brake warning lamp is on in
the instrument panel.
Do not use the accelerator to hold
your vehicle on a gradient. Use ei-
ther the brake pedal or the parking
brake.
Before doing anything in the en-
gine compartment, check that the
selector is in neutral N .
Changing gear
Pull the " + " paddle to change up
a gear.
Pull the " - " paddle to change
down a gear.
The paddles do not permit you to se-
lect neutral or reverse gear, or to exit
reverse gear.
- If the vehicle stops or reduces
speed (for example when ap-
proaching a stop sign), the gear-
box changes down automatically,
to fi rst gear if needed.
112
IX
D R I V I N G
HILL START ASSIST (WITH
THE 6-SPEED ELECTRONIC
GEARBOX SYSTEM)
System which holds your vehicle
temporarily (approximately 2 sec-
onds) when starting on a slope, the
time it takes to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal.
This function is only active when:
- the vehicle is completely station-
ary, with your foot on the brake
pedal,
- in particular conditions on a slope,
- with the driver’s door closed.
The hill start assist function cannot
be deactivated.
Operation
Operating fault
If a malfunction of the system oc-
curs, these warning lamps come on.
Contact a CITROËN dealer to have
the system checked.
On an ascending slope, with the
vehicle stationary, the vehicle is
held momentarily when you re-
lease the brake pedal:
- provided you are in A or M on an
electronic gearbox.
On a descending slope, with the
vehicle stationary and reverse
gear engaged, the vehicle is held
momentarily when you release
the brake pedal.
Do not exit the vehicle while
it is being held in the hill
start assist phase.
If you need to exit the vehicle with
the engine running, manually apply
the parking brake and ensure that
the warning lamp P (red) on the in-
strument panel is permanently on.
113
IX
D R I V I N G
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
Automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of fully
automatic operation, enhanced by
the sport and snow programmes, or
manual gear changing.
You have a choice of four driving
modes:
- automatic operation for elec-
tronic control of the gears by the
gearbox,
- the SPORT programme for a
more dynamic style of driving,
- the SNOW programme to im-
prove driving in conditions of
poor grip,
- manual operation for sequen-
tial changing of the gears by the
driver.
Mode selection
Automatic mode: selector in po-
sition D .
Sequential mode: selector in po-
sition M .
SPORT mode: selector in posi-
tion D with button " S " pressed.
SNOW mode: selector in posi-
tion D with button " " pressed.
Displays on the instrument
panel
The position of the gear selector is
displayed on the instrument panel.
A position grille on the selector
shows the selected position.
To start the engine, the selector
has to be in position P or N .
For safety:
- position P can be disengaged
only if you press the brake pedal,
- when a door is opened, an audi-
ble signal is heard if the selector
is not in position P ,
- always make sure that the se-
lector is in position P before
you leave your vehicle.
If the gearbox is in position P but
the position of the selector is diffe-
rent, reposition the selector on P
so that you can start the vehicle.
Moving off
114
IX
D R I V I N G
Press the brake pedal.
Operate the starter.
When the engine is running,
place the selector on R , D or M
as required.
Check, in the instrument panel,
the position engaged.
Gradually release the brake pedal
and accelerate.
To avoid a difference between
the position of the selector and
the actual position of the gear-
box, only exit from position P
with the ignition on and the brake
pedal pressed.
Park
Reverse gear
This position of the selector is used
to prevent the vehicle from moving
when you are stationary.
To select position P , move the
selector back to the highest po-
sition (towards R ), then push it
forwards and then to the left.
Only engage this position when
the vehicle is stationary. To prevent
snatching, do not accelerate too
soon after selection.
Neutral
Never select position N if the vehicle
is moving.
Never select positions P or
R if the vehicle is not sta-
tionary.
If, while the vehicle is moving, po-
sition N is engaged inadvertently,
allow the engine to idle before en-
gaging position D or M .
Otherwise, when the ignition is on or
the engine is running:
reposition the selector in position P ,
put your foot on the brake pedal
and then select the gear you want.
Automatic operation
Move the selector to position D .
The gearbox constantly selects
the gear that is best suited to the
following conditions:
- driving style,
- road profi le,
- vehicle load.
The gearbox is then operating in
auto-adaptive mode, without re-
quiring any action on your part.
For certain manoeuvres (for exam-
ple overtaking), you can obtain ma-
ximum acceleration by pressing the
accelerator pedal down hard, which
then produces an automatic change
down to a lower gear.
When braking, the gearbox may
change down automatically in order
to provide effective engine braking.
If you lift your foot off the accelerator
abruptly, the gearbox will not change up.
To exit position P , move the se-
lector to the right and then to the
position you want.
Only engage this position when
the vehicle is completely sta-
tionary. In this position, the front
wheels are locked. Make sure
that the selector is correctly po-
sitioned.
115
IX
D R I V I N G
Manual operation
SPORT and SNOW
programmes
These two special programmes sup-
plement the automatic operation in
very specifi c conditions of use.
Selector position for manual gear
changing.
The fl ashing of the warning lamp for
the position requested signals that
this position is not yet obtained.
If the warning lamp is on fi xed, the
position is confi rmed.
Lighting of a dash in the rev coun-
ter indicates an operating fault. In
this case:
- a marked snatching may be felt
when selecting R for reverse
gear,
- the gearbox is locked in a gear,
- do not exceed 60 mph (approx.
100 km/h).
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
- A request to change gear is ac-
cepted only if the engine speed
permits it.
- For safety reasons, depending
on the engine speed, a change
up or down may be performed
automatically.
- It is possible at any time to move
from position D (driving in auto-
matic mode) to position M (driving
in sequential mode) or vice versa.
- The SPORT and SNOW modes
do not operate in sequential
mode.
SPORT programme "S"
With the lever in position D and the
engine running, press button " S ".
The gearbox automatically favours a
dynamic style of driving.
" S " appears on the instrument panel.
Move the selector to position M .
Push the lever towards the " + "
sign to change up a gear.
Pull the lever towards the " - " sign
to change down a gear.
- If the vehicle stops or reduces
speed (for example when ap-
proaching a stop sign), the gear-
box changes down automatically,
to fi rst gear if necessary.
- In sequential mode, it is not nec-
essary to release the accelerator
during gear changes.
SNOW programme " "
With the lever in position D and the
engine running, press button " ".
The gearbox adapts to driving on
slippery roads.
This programme facilitates starting
and traction in conditions of poor grip.
" " appears on the instrument panel.
Return to automatic operation
Press the button selected again
at any time to exit from the pro-
gramme engaged and return to
auto-adaptive mode.
116
IX
D R I V I N G
SPEED LIMITER
System which prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by
the driver.
Once the limit speed has been
reached, the accelerator pedal no
longer has any effect.
The speed limiter is switched
on manually: a speed of at least
20 mph (around 30 km/h) must be
programmed.
The speed limiter cannot, in any cir-
cumstances, take the place of the
observance of speed limits or of the
vigilance and responsibility of the
driver.
Steering mounted controls
The speed limiter controls are located
on the left-hand side of the steering
wheel.
Displays on the instrument panel
The programmed information is
grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel screen.
Programming
Rotate the control 1 to the "LIM" po-
sition.
On selection of the function, the
previous memorised speed and the
information "OFF" are displayed on
the instrument panel.
With the engine running, you can
adjust the memorised maximum
speed, by means of short or long
presses on:
button 4 to increase the memo-
rised maximum speed,
button 2 to decrease the memo-
rised maximum speed.
Successive presses will modify the
maximum speed in steps of 1 mph
and a sustained press in steps of
3 mph.
Activation
When the desired maximum speed
is displayed, press button 3 so that
the limitation is activated.
The information "OFF" then disap-
pears from the instrument panel
screen.
While the function is active, pres-
sing the accelerator pedal will not
enable the programmed speed to be
exceeded, except if you press the
pedal hard down to beyond the end-
of-travel switch.
The speed of your vehicle may vary
slightly in relation to that memo-
rised.
Deactivation
Press on button 3 .
This action causes the information
"OFF" to appear on the instrument
panel screen.
This action does not cancel the
memorised maximum speed which
remains displayed in zone A of the
instrument panel.
117
IX
D R I V I N G
Override of the programmed
speed
The accelerator pedal is equipped
with an end-of-travel switch. If you
action this switch by pressing the
pedal hard down, you can exceed
the memorised maximum speed at
any time.
During the time the speed is be-
ing exceeded, the displayed speed
fl ashes.
You have only to release the ac-
celerator pedal to return below the
maximum speed and render the
function active again.
If during the operation of the speed
limiter, the system is unable to keep
within the maximum speed (for exam-
ple on a steep descent or under heavy
acceleration) then the speed fl ashes.
Adapt your speed as necessary.
The function will re-engage when
your speed returns below the de-
sired maximum speed.
Return to normal driving
By moving the control 1 from po-
sition "LIM" to position 0 .
By the engine stopping.
The speed previously chosen is still
memorised.
Operating fault
If there is a speed limiter malfunc-
tion, a message will display accom-
panied by an audible signal and
lighting of the service warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer.
On a steep downhill gradient or on
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding the programmed
speed.
Use of fl oor mats that are not ap-
proved by CITROËN may hinder
access to the accelerator pedal and
thus interfere with the functioning of
the speed limiter.
To avoid any risk of interfering with
the pedals:
- check that the fl oor mat is cor-
rectly positioned,
- never use more than one fl oor
mat.
118
IX
D R I V I N G
CRUISE CONTROL
System which automatically main-
tains the vehicle speed programmed
by the driver, without any action on
the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on
manually: the vehicle speed must be
at least 25 mph (approx. 40 km/h)
and you must engage:
- fourth gear on a manual gearbox,
- second gear, in sequential mode,
on an electronic gearbox or au-
tomatic gearbox,
- position A on an electronic gear-
box or D on an automatic gearbox.
The cruise control cannot, in any cir-
cumstances, take the place of the
observance of speed limits or of the
vigilance and responsibility of the
driver.
Steering mounted controls
The cruise control switches are lo-
cated on the left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
Displays on the instrument panel
The programmed information is
grouped together in zone A of the
instrument panel screen.
Programming
Rotate the control 1 to the "REG"
position.
Activation
On selection of the function via con-
trol 1, no cruise speed has yet
been memorised .
Once the desired speed has been
reached using the accelerator, press
button 2 or button 4 . The cruise
speed is then memorised. It is dis-
played in zone A of the instrument
panel.
You can then release the accelerator
pedal. The vehicle will automatically
keep to the speed chosen.
The speed of your vehicle may vary
slightly in relation to that memo-
rised.
You can adjust the memorised speed
on the instrument panel screen by
pressing on:
button 4 to increase the speed,
button 2 to decrease the speed.
Successive presses modify the
cruise speed in steps of 1 mph and a
sustained press in steps of 3 mph.
119
IX
D R I V I N G
Deactivation
Either by pressing on the brake
pedal or on the clutch pedal.
Or by pressing button 3 .
Or if either the ESP or the ASR
system is active.
The cruise control is not active if the
gear lever is in neutral.
These actions cause the information
"OFF" to appear on the instrument
panel screen.
These actions do not cancel the
cruise speed which remains dis-
played in the instrument panel.
Reactivation
By recall of the memorised
speed
After a disengagement, press on
button 3 . Your vehicle automati-
cally returns to the memorised
cruise speed which is displayed
in zone A .
If the memorised cruise speed
is higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate to
reach the former.
By selection of the current
speed
Press on button 2 or 4 once the
desired speed has been reached.
The information "OFF" will then
disappear from the instrument
panel display.
Overriding the programmed
speed
During the operation of cruise con-
trol, it is always possible to use the
accelerator to go faster than the
cruise speed (for example to over-
take another vehicle). The speed
displayed in zone A fl ashes.
You have only to release the accel-
erator pedal to return to the cruise
speed.
Return to normal driving
By an action on the control 1 from
position "REG" to position 0 .
By the engine stopping.
The cruise speed previously
chosen is no longer memorised.
Operating fault
If there is a malfunction, a message
will display accompanied by an au-
dible signal and lighting of the ser-
vice warning lamp.
Have it checked by a CITROËN
dealer.
If during the operation of cruise
control, the system is unable to
keep within the memorised speed
(for example on a steep descent),
then the speed fl ashes. Adapt your
speed as necessary.
Cruise control should only be used
when the driving conditions allow
you to drive at a constant speed.
Do not use it in heavy traffi c, or on
dangerous or slippery roads.
The driver must remain attentive
and in full control of his vehicle.
You are recommended to keep your
feet within range of the pedals.
To avoid any risk of interfering with
the pedals:
- check that the fl oor mat is cor-
rectly positioned,
- never use more than one fl oor
mat.
120
IX
D R I V I N G
LANE DEPARTURE
WARNING SYSTEM
System which detects the involun-
tary crossing of longitudinal traffi c
lane markings on the ground (solid
or broken line).
Sensors, fi tted below the front bum-
per, trigger a warning if the vehicle
drifts over a lane marking (speed
higher than 50 mph (80 km/h)).
This system is particularly useful on
motorways and main roads.
Activation
Press button A , the indicator
lamp comes on.
Deactivation
Press button A again, the indicator
lamp switches off.
The status of the system remains
in the memory when the ignition is
switched off.
Detection
You are warned by the vibration of
the driver's seat cushion:
- on the right-hand side, if the
marking on the ground has been
crossed on the right,
- on the left-hand side, if the mark-
ing on the ground has been
crossed on the left.
No warning is transmitted while the
direction indicator is active and for
approximately 20 seconds after the
direction indicator is switched off.
A warning may be transmitted if a
direction marking (e.g. arrow) or
non-standard marking (e.g. graffi ti)
is crossed.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction, the
service warning lamp comes on, ac-
companied by an audible signal and a
message on the multifunction screen.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
The lane departure warning sys-
tem cannot, in any circumstances,
replace the need for vigilance and
responsibility on the part of the
driver.
The detection may be impeded:
- if the sensors are dirty (mud,
snow...),
- if the markings on the ground
are worn,
- if there is little contrast between
the markings on the ground and
the road surface.
121
IX
D R I V I N G
VISUAL AND AUDIBLE
FRONT AND/OR REAR
PARKING SENSORS
System consisting of four proximity
sensors, installed in the front and/or
rear bumper.
It detects any obstacle (person, ve-
hicle, tree, barrier...) located behind
the vehicle, however, it will not be
able to detect obstacles located im-
mediately below the bumper.
An object, such as a stake, a road-
works cone or any other similar ob-
ject may be detected at the start of
the manoeuvre but may no longer
be detected when the vehicle moves
nearer to it.
The parking sensors are switched
off :
- when you exit reverse gear,
- when the speed is higher than
6 mph (10 km/h) in forward gear,
- when the vehicle has been station-
ary for more than three seconds in
forward gear.
The parking sensor system cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the
need for vigilance and responsibility
on the part of the driver.
The parking sensors are switched
on :
- by engaging reverse gear,
- at a speed below 6 mph (10 km/h)
in forward gear.
This is accompanied by an audible
signal and display of the vehicle on
the multifunction screen.
The proximity information is indica-
ted by:
- an audible signal which be-
comes more rapid as the vehicle
approaches the obstacle,
- a diagram on the multifunction
screen, with blocks which move
closer to the vehicle.
The obstacle is located in relation to
the emission of the audible signal by
the speakers; front or rear and right
or left.
When the distance between the ve-
hicle and the obstacle is less than
approximately thirty centimetres, the
audible signal becomes continuous
and/or the "Danger" symbol appears,
depending on the multifunction screen
version.
122
D R I V I N G
In bad weather or in winter, ensure
that the sensors are not covered
with mud, ice or snow. When re-
verse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that
the sensors may be dirty.
When the vehicle is being driven
at a speed below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h), certain sourc-
es of noise (motorcycles, lorries,
pneumatic drills, ...) may trigger the
parking sensor audible signals.
Reactivation
Press button A again, the warning
lamp switches off, the system is
reactivated.
Deactivation Operating fault
If an operating fault occurs, this warn-
ing lamp is displayed on the instrument
panel and/or a message appears on
the multifunction screen, accompa-
nied by an audible signal (short beep),
when reverse gear is engaged.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
Press button A , the warning lamp
comes on, the system is fully de-
activated.
The system will be deactivated au-
tomatically when a trailer is being
towed or when a bicycle carrier is
fi tted (vehicle fi tted with a towbar
or bicycle carrier recommended by
CITROËN).
124
X
C H E C K S
BONNET
Protects the components of the
engine and provides access for
checking levels.
Opening
Push the exterior safety catch B
to the left and raise the bonnet.
Unclip the stay C from its housing.
Fix the stay in the notch to hold
the bonnet open.
Closing
Take the stay out of the support
notch.
Clip the stay in its housing.
Lower the bonnet then slam it
fi rmly at the end of its travel.
Pull on the bonnet to check that
it is secured correctly.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns).
This operation must only be carried
out when the vehicle is stationary.
Avoid opening the bonnet in strong
winds.
Pull to the right the interior re-
lease lever A , located under the
dashboard.
125
X
C H E C K S
BLEEDING THE DIESEL
FILTER
Protective cover
Removal
Remove the protective cover by
unclipping fi rst point 1 , then 3
and 4 .
Unclip point 2 pulling towards
you, then lift.
Refi tting
Clip point 2 fi rst.
Lower the cover, centring it.
Clip points 1 and 4 , pushing ver-
tically and slightly rearwards.
Clip point 3 , pushing vertically.
Bleeding water from
the fuel filter
Bleed on a regular basis (at every
oil change).
To evacuate the water, slacken the
bleed screw or the water-in-diesel-
fuel sensor, which is located at the
base of the fi lter.
Continue until water ceases to fl ow
out.
Then retighten the bleed screw or
the water-in-diesel-fuel sensor.
126
C H E C K S
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
(DIESEL)
HDi 135 and 140 engine
Detach the protection cover to gain
access to the priming pump.
HDi 90 and 110 engine
Detach the protection cover to gain
access to the priming pump.
Priming the fuel system
In the event of running out of fuel:
after fi lling (minimum 5 litres),
squeeze the manual priming
pump repeatedly, until some re-
sistance is felt,
then operate the starter, gently
pressing the accelerator until the
engine starts.
If the engine fails to start at the fi rst
attempt, wait 15 seconds before
trying again.
If the engine fails to start after a few
attempts, repeat the procedure from
the beginning. When the engine is
idling, accelerate gently to complete
the purge of the circuit.
HDi engines are of a highly
technical nature.
All maintenance and re-
pairs require specialist knowledge
which only your CITROËN dealer
can assure.
127
X
C H E C K S
PETROL ENGINES
The covers and caps allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids and for replacing certain components.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp wash
reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fl uid reservoir.
5. Battery.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air fi lter * .
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil fi ller cap.
* According to engine.
128
X
C H E C K S
* According to engine.
DIESEL ENGINES
The covers and caps allow access for checking the levels of the various fl uids, for replacing certain components and for
priming the fuel system.
1. Power steering reservoir.
2. Screenwash and headlamp
wash reservoir.
3. Coolant reservoir.
4. Brake fl uid reservoir.
5. Battery.
6. Fusebox.
7. Air fi lter * .
8. Engine oil dipstick.
9. Engine oil fi ller cap.
10. Priming pump * .
11. Bleed screw * .
As the diesel fuel system is
pressurised, any work on
this system is prohibited.
129
X
C H E C K S
CHECKING LEVELS
Check all of these levels regularly
and top them up if necessary, unless
otherwise indicated.
If a level drops signifi cantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a
CITROËN dealer.
Take care when working under the
bonnet, as some parts of the engine
can be extremely hot (risk of burns).
Oil level
Oil change
Refer to the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide for details of the in-
terval for this operation.
Oil specifi cation
The oil must correspond to your engine
and conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
Brake fluid level
Fluid change
Refer to the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide for details of the in-
terval for this operation.
This fl uid must be changed regu-
larly. Fluid which has been used for
too long may cause a loss of braking
effi ciency.
Fluid specifi cation
The brake fl uid must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations
and fulfi l the DOT4 standards.
Coolant level
Coolant change
The coolant does not have to be
changed.
Fluid specifi cation
The coolant must conform to the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The reading will only be
correct if the vehicle is on
level ground and the engine
has been off for more than
15 minutes.
The check is carried out either when
the ignition is switched on using the
oil level indicator on the instrument
panel, or using the dipstick.
Check this level also between each
scheduled service and before long
journeys.
The brake fl uid level should
be close to the "MAX" mark.
If it is not, check the brake
pad wear.
The coolant level should be
close to the "MAX" mark but
should never exceed it.
When the engine is warm, the tem-
perature of the coolant is regulated
by the fan. This can operate with the
ignition off.
On vehicles which are fi tted with
a particle emission fi lter, the fan
may operate after the vehicle has
been switched off, even if the en-
gine is cold.
In addition, as the cooling system is
pressurised, wait at least one hour
after switching off the engine before
carrying out any work.
To avoid any risk of scalding, un-
screw the cap by two turns to al-
low the pressure to drop. When the
pressure has dropped, remove the
cap and top up the level.
In order to maintain the re-
liability of the engine and
emission control system,
the use of additives in the engine
oil is prohibited.
130
C H E C K S
Screenwash and headlamp
wash fluid
Fluid specifi cation
For optimum cleaning and to avoid
freezing, this fl uid must not be topped
up or replaced with plain water.
Reservoir capacities:
- screenwash: approximately 3 litres,
- screenwash and headlamp
wash: approximately 6 litres.
Diesel additive level (Diesel
engine with particle emission
filter)
A low additive level is indicated by
lighting of the service warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible warning
and a message on the multifunction
screen.
Topping up
This additive must be topped up by
a CITROËN dealer without delay.
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of
used oil or fl uids with the
skin.
Most of these fl uids are harmful to
health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or
fl uids into sewers or onto
the ground.
Take used oil to a CITROËN deal-
er (France) or an authorised waste
disposal site.
In the case of vehicles fi tted
with headlamp washers, the
minimum level of this fl uid is
indicated by an audible signal
and a message on the multifunction
screen.
Top up the level when you next stop
the vehicle.
131
X
C H E C K S
CHECKS
Unless otherwise indicated, check
these components in accordance
with the Warranty and Maintenance
Record and according to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a
CITROËN dealer.
Battery
The battery does not re-
quire any maintenance.
However, check that the
terminals are clean and
correctly tightened, particu-
larly in summer and winter.
When carrying out work on the bat-
tery, refer to the "Practical infor-
mation" section for details of the
precautions to be taken before dis-
connecting the battery and following
its reconnection.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the Warranty and
Maintenance Record for
details of the replacement
intervals for these compo-
nents.
Depending on the environment (e.g.
dusty atmosphere) and the use of
the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace
them twice as often if necessary
(refer to the "Engines" section).
A clogged passenger compartment
fi lter may have an adverse effect on
the performance of the air condition-
ing system and generate undesirable
odours.
Oil filter
Replace the oil fi lter each
time the engine oil is
changed.
Particle filter system (Diesel)
Complementary to the catalytic
converter, this fi lter makes an ac-
tive contribution to the preservation
of air quality by the retaining of the
unburnt pollutant particles. Black
exhaust fumes are thus no longer
emitted.
After prolonged idling or driving at very
low speeds, you may occasionally no-
tice water vapour being emitted from
the exhaust when accelerating. This is
of no consequence to the running of
the vehicle or to the environment.
If there is risk of clogging, a message
appears on the multifunction screen,
accompanied by an audible signal
and lighting of the service warning
lamp.
This alert tells you that the particle
fi lter is starting to fi ll up (in condi-
tions of urban driving of exception-
ally long duration: low speeds, traffi c
jams etc.)
To regenerate the fi lter, it is advised
to drive as soon as possible, when
traffi c conditions permit, at a speed
of 40 mph (around 60 km/h) or
more for at least fi ve minutes (until
the alert message disappears).
If this alert persists, consult a
CITROËN dealer.
Refer to the Warranty and Maintenance
Record for details of the replacement
interval for this component.
132
X
C H E C K S
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on
the style of driving, par-
ticularly in the case of ve-
hicles used in town, over
short distances. It may be
necessary to have the condition of
the brakes checked, even between
vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a
drop in the brake fl uid level indicates
that the brake pads are worn.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no
oil change).
6-speed electronic gearbox
system
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no
oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not re-
quire any maintenance (no
oil change).
Brake disc wear
For information relating to
checking the brake disc
wear, contact a CITROËN
dealer.
Parking brake
If a loss of effectiveness
of this system is noticed,
the parking brake must be
checked, even between
two services.
This system must be checked by a
CITROËN dealer.
Only use products recom-
mended by CITROËN or
products of equivalent qual-
ity and specifi cations.
In order to optimise the operation
of units as important as the braking
system, CITROËN selects and of-
fers very specifi c products.
To avoid damaging the electrical
units, the use of a high pressure
washer in the engine compartment
is strictly prohibited .
Refer to the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide for the details of the
level checking interval for this com-
ponent.
Refer to the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide for details of the
checking interval for this component.
Refer to the Maintenance and
Warranty Guide for details of the
level checking interval for this com-
ponent.
133
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
CHANGING A WHEEL
Access to the tools
The tools are located in the spare
wheel, under the boot fl oor.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
lift the fl oor,
unclip and remove the box con-
taining the tools.
List of tools
All of these tools are specifi c to your
vehicle. Do not use them for other
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace *
2. Jack with handle *
3. Aluminium wheel central embel-
lisher removal tool *
4. Socket for security bolts (located
in the glove box)
Fits the wheelbrace
5. Removable towing eye
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the
boot, under the fl oor.
Removing the wheel
Undo the yellow central screw by
a quarter turn.
Raise the spare wheel towards
you rearwards.
Remove the wheel from the boot
space.
* Only where the vehicle has a spare
wheel.
133
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
CHANGING A WHEEL
Access to the tools
The tools are located in the spare
wheel, under the boot fl oor.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
lift the fl oor,
unclip and remove the box con-
taining the tools.
List of tools
All of these tools are specifi c to your
vehicle. Do not use them for other
purposes.
1. Wheelbrace *
2. Jack with handle *
3. Aluminium wheel central embel-
lisher removal tool *
4. Socket for security bolts (located
in the glove box)
Fits the wheelbrace
5. Removable towing eye
Access to the spare wheel
The spare wheel is installed in the
boot, under the fl oor.
Removing the wheel
Undo the yellow central screw by
a quarter turn.
Raise the spare wheel towards
you rearwards.
Remove the wheel from the boot
space.
* Only where the vehicle has a spare
wheel.
134
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Refi tting the wheel
Dimension of the spare wheel
If your spare wheel is of different di-
mensions to those on the vehicle
(identifi ed by a label), it is essential
to use it only on a temporary basis,
to drive not above 50 mph (80 km/h)
and to have the original wheel refi tted
as soon as possible.
Switch on your hazard
warning lamps.
Ensure that occupants
get out of the vehicle and wait in
a safe location.
Never get underneath the vehicle
if it is supported only by the jack;
use an axle stand.
The jack is designed specifi cally
for your vehicle, do not use it for
other applications.
The wheel should be correctly
positioned fl at in the centre of
its well.
Aluminium wheels
If your vehicle is equipped with al-
uminium wheels and a steel spare
wheel, then if fi tting the latter it is
normal to note that the heads of the
wheel bolts do not come to bear on
the wheel rim.
The steel spare wheel is secured
by the conical tapering of the wheel
bolts’ shafts, see diagram.
When refi tting the aluminium wheel,
ensure that the wheel bolt heads are
in undamaged condition.
Refi t the wheel in place.
Undo the yellow central screw by
a few turns, then position it at the
centre of the wheel.
Do up the central screw until tight
so that the wheel is securely re-
tained in place.
Refi t the repaired original wheel
as soon as possible.
With a spare wheel fi tted, drive
with caution.
135
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Removing a wheel
List of operations
Park the vehicle on stable, fi rm
ground. Apply the parking brake.
Switch off the ignition and en-
gage fi rst gear or reverse gear,
depending on the slope (for ve-
hicles with automatic gearbox,
select position P).
Detach the embellisher using the
wheelbrace 1 by pulling close to
the valve.
For vehicles with aluminium
wheels, slide the embellisher re-
moval tool 3 into the slot in the
central embellisher and apply
fi rm leverage to detach.
Slacken the wheel bolts using
the wheelbrace 1 .
For vehicles fi tted with security
wheel bolts, slacken the security
bolts using the socket 4 fi tted on
the wheelbrace 1 .
Position the jack 2 under the
bodyshell, exactly as in the illus-
tration at the mark A , closest to
the wheel that is to be replaced.
Operate the jack 2 until its base
is in contact with the ground.
Make sure that the base of the
jack is vertically below the jack-
ing point used.
Raise the vehicle.
Remove the bolts and disengage
the wheel.
List of operations
Position the wheel on the hub.
Do up the 3 bolts by hand.
Position the 4th bolt.
Pretighten the bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 . For vehicles fi tted
with security wheel bolts, pretighten
the security bolt using the socket 4
fi tted on the wheelbrace 1 .
Retract the jack 2 and disengage it.
Tighten the wheel bolts using the
wheelbrace 1 and the security
bolts using the socket 4 .
Reposition the embellisher, com-
mencing by placing the slot at
the valve, pressing it home with
the palm of your hand.
For vehicles fi tted with aluminium
wheels, reclip the central embel-
lisher in place.
Stow the tools and the wheel in
the boot.
Check the tyre pressure and
also have the wheel balancing
checked.
Fitting a wheel
136
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
TEMPORARY PUNCTURE
REPAIR KIT
Using the kit
Do not remove any foreign bodies
which have penetrated the tyre.
Repair procedure
Connect the compressor’s elec-
tric plug to the vehicle’s 12 V
socket.
Affi x the speed limitation sticker
to the vehicle's steering wheel
to remind you that a wheel is in
temporary use.
Start the vehicle and leave the
engine running.
Complete system consisting of a
compressor and a sealant cartridge
which permits temporary repair of
the tyre so that you can drive to the
nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punc-
tures which could affect the tyre,
located on the tyre tread or shoulder.
Take care, this product
is harmful (e.g. ethylene-
glycol, colophony...) if swal-
lowed and causes irritation
to the eyes. Keep it out of reach of
children.
Access to the kit
Switch off the ignition.
Turn the selector A to the
"SEALANT" position:
Check that the switch B
is in position "0" .
Unscrew the cap from the white
pipe C .
Connect the white pipe to the
valve of the tyre to be repaired.
137
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Switch on the compressor by
moving the switch B to posi-
tion "I" until the tyre pressure
reaches 2.0 bars.
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the
pressure is not attained, this indicates
that the tyre is not repairable; contact
a CITROËN dealer for assistance.
Remove the kit and rescrew the
cap on the white pipe. Take care
to avoid staining your vehicle
with traces of fl uid. Keep the kit
to hand.
Drive immediately for approximate-
ly three miles (fi ve kilometres), at
reduced speed (between 15 and
35 mph [20 and 60 km/h]), to plug
the puncture.
Stop to check the repair and the
tyre pressure using the kit.
Checking tyre pressures/
Infl ating accessories
You can use the compressor, with-
out injecting the product, for the
routine check and adjustment of
the tyre pressures on your vehicle.
It can also be used to infl ate other
items such as a ball or bicycle tyre.
Turn the selector to the "AIR" posi-
tion, connect the black pipe to the
valve of the wheel or the item to
be infl ated with, if necessary, one
of the connectors supplied with the
kit, then follow the remainder of the
procedure below until the kit is re-
moved.
Turn the selector A to
the "AIR" position:
Connect the black pipe D to the
valve of the wheel.
138
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Go to a CITROËN dealer
as soon as possible. You
must tell the technician
that you have used the kit.
Have the tyre inspected by the
technician, who can then advise
you whether it can be repaired or
should be replaced.
Connect the compressor's elec-
tric plug to the vehicle's 12 V
socket.
Start the vehicle again and leave
the engine running.
The expiry date of the fl uid is
indicated on the cartridge.
The sealant cartridge is de-
signed for single use; even if only
partly used, it must be replaced.
After use, do not discard the car-
tridge into the environment, take
it to an authorised waste disposal
site or a CITROËN dealer.
Do not forget to obtain a new
sealant cartridge, available from
CITROËN dealers.
Adjust the pressure using the
compressor (to infl ate: switch B in
position "I" ; to defl ate: switch B in
position "0" and press button E ),
in accordance with the vehicle's
tyre pressure label (located on the
left hand door aperture).
A loss of pressure indicates that
the puncture has not been fully
plugged; contact a CITROËN
dealer for assistance.
Remove and stow the kit.
Drive at reduced speed (50 mph
[80 km/h] max) limiting the dis-
tance travelled to approximately
120 miles (200 km).
Removing the cartridge
Stow the black pipe.
Detach the curved base of the
white pipe.
Support the compressor verti-
cally.
Unscrew the cartridge from the
bottom.
Beware of fl uid leaking.
139
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Model with halogen headlamps
The headlamps are fi tted with poly-
carbonate glass with a protective
coating:
do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a
detergent or solvent product,
use a sponge and soapy water,
when using a high pressure
washer on persistent marks, do
not direct at the lamps or their
outlines for too long, so as not to
damage their protective coating
and seals.
Do not touch the bulb di-
rectly with your fi ngers,
use lint-free cloths.
Changing a halogen bulb should
only be done after the headlamp
has been switched off for a few
minutes (risk of serious burns).
It is imperative to use only anti-ultra-
violet (UV) type bulbs in order not to
damage the headlamp.
1. Dipped beams (H7-55 W)
2. Main beams (H1-55 W)
3. Sidelamps (H6W-6 W)
4. Direction indicators
(H21-21 W)
CHANGING A BULB
Procedure for replacing a faulty bulb
with a new bulb without the use of
tools.
Front lamps
140
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Dipped beam headlamps
Remove the rubber cover.
Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
turn anti-clockwise and remove it
from its housing.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Reposition the bulb-holder by
pushing it in, tightening it by a
quarter turn clockwise.
Refi t the rubber cover.
Main beam headlamps
Remove the rubber cover.
Detach the clips by lowering
them on each side of the bulb.
Pull on the bulb-holder to remove it.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Push the bulb-holder back into
its housing.
Reattach the clips.
Refi t the rubber cover.
Sidelamps
Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
turn anti-clockwise.
Remove it from its housing.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Reposition the bulb-holder.
Rotate it a quarter turn clockwise
to reposition in its housing.
141
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Direction indicators Integrated direction indicator
side repeaters
The direction indicator bulb is located
underneath the main beam bulb.
Remove the rubber cover.
Pull on the bulb-holder to remove it.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Reposition the bulb-holder in the
bracket and push it in.
Refi t the rubber cover.
To change the repeater, press down-
wards fi rmly on the zone indicated
by the arrow, then pull the repeater.
Repeaters can be obtained from a
CITROËN dealer.
142
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
If the headlamp bears this
symbol, any operation to
change the Xenon dual-
function directional head-
lamp (D1S-35 W) must be carried
out by professionals (risk of elec-
trocution).
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
It is recommended to change both
bulbs at the same time if one of
them is faulty.
Dual-function Xenon headlamps
(dipped/main beam)
Additional main beams
Remove the rubber cover.
Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
turn anti-clockwise and remove it
from its housing.
Replace the faulty bulb.
Reposition the bulb-holder by
pushing it in, tightening it by a
quarter turn clockwise.
Refi t the rubber cover.
When using a high-pres-
sure washer on persistent
marks, do not direct the jet
at the lamps or their edges for too
long, so as to avoid damaging their
protective coating and seals.
Model with Xenon headlamps
and directional headlamps
1. Dual-function Xenon
headlamps (dipped/main beam)
2. Additional main beams
(H7- 55W )
3. Sidelamps (H6W- 6W )
(see previous page)
4. Direction indicators
(H21- 21W )
(see previous page)
Changing foglamp bulbs
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
143
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Rear lamps
(5-door model)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Sidelamps: W 5.
2. Stop lamps and sidelamps:
P 21/5.
3. Direction indicators:
PY 21 W.
Open the boot:
First remove the top part of the
rear lamp unit by undoing the
screw A .
For access to the nut B , detach
the boot rear trim by removing
the pins. Undo B .
Remove the bottom part of the
lamp unit.
Turn the bulb a quarter turn and
change it.
Changing the bulbs
Rear lamps
(3-door model)
Identify the failed bulb.
1. Direction indicators:
P 21 W.
2. Reversing lamps: P 21 W.
3. Stop lamps and sidelamps:
P 21/5.
144
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Foglamp
Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
turn.
Bulb: P21.
Reversing lamp
(5-door model)
Rotate the bulb-holder a quarter
turn.
Bulb: P21.
After replacing a bulb, check the
correct operation of the lamp.
For access to the nut B , detach
the boot rear trim by removing
the pins. Undo B .
Remove the bulb-holder by de-
taching the points A .
Disengage the lamp unit.
Turn the bulb a quarter turn and
change it.
Changing the bulbs
145
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Number plate lamps
(W5W)
Insert a thin screwdriver into one
of the external holes of the lens.
Push it outwards to unclip it.
Remove the lens.
Change the faulty bulb.
Third brake lamp (diodes)
For the replacement of this type of diode lamp, contact a CITROËN dealer.
146
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Interior lighting
Interior lamp (1/W5W)
Detach the cover of the interior
lamp 1 with a thin screwdriver, close
to the button, to access the faulty
bulb.
Map reading lamps (2/W5W)
Detach the cover of the interior lamp.
To access the faulty bulb, detach the
partition for the reading lamp 2 con-
cerned, as necessary.
Boot lamp (W5W)
Detach the unit by pushing it rear-
wards.
Sill lamps (W5W)
Detach the lamp to access the bulb.
Glove box lamp (W5W)
Detach the lamp to access the bulb.
147
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
CHANGING A FUSE
Procedure for replacing a faulty fuse
with a new fuse to rectify a failure of
the corresponding function.
There are two fuseboxes under the
dashboard, one fusebox in the en-
gine compartment and another on
the battery.
Changing a fuse
Before replacing a fuse, it is essen-
tial to fi nd the cause of the incident
and to have it rectifi ed. The fuse
identifi cation numbers are indicated
inside the fusebox.
Replace a blown fuse with one of the
same rating (the same colour).
Use the special tool A that is pro-
vided in the fuse housing fl ap, which
also contains spare fuses.
Correct Incorrect
Tool A
Access to the fi rst dashboard
fusebox
Fuses under the dashboard
Your vehicle’s electrical
system is designed to oper-
ate with either standard or
optional equipment.
Before installing electrical equip-
ment or accessories on your vehi-
cle, consult a CITROËN dealer.
CITROËN declines all responsibil-
ity for the consequences and costs
that are caused by faults or repairs
on your vehicle resulting from the
installation of accessories that
are not supplied and/or not rec-
ommended by CITROËN and not
installed according to its instruc-
tions, particularly when the energy
consumption of all of the additional
accessories connected exceeds
10 milliamperes (mA).
148
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Fuses under the dashboard
Access to the fuses
Open the glove box.
Undo the screw by a quarter turn
and pivot the housing.
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 15 A Rear screen wipe
F2 30 A Central locking - Deadlocking
F3 5 A Airbags and pretensioners
F4 10 A
Diagnostic socket - Brake switch - Photochromic rear view mirror - ESP - Coolant level
sensor - Diesel additive - Clutch pedal switch (ESP, cruise control and speed limiter)
F5 30 A Front windows, Heated door mirrors
F6 30 A Rear windows
F7 5 A Interior lighting
F8 20 A
Multifunction screen, radio, steering mounted controls, Screens - Alarm - Front 12 V socket -
Trailer unit - Driving school module
F9 30 A Cigar lighter - Rear 12 V socket
F10 15 A Defl ation detection - Automatic gearbox - STOP switch
F11 15 A Ignition switch - Diagnostic socket - Particle fi lter
F12 15 A Electric seat - Lane departure warning system - Parking sensors
F13 5 A Rain sensor - Sunshine sensor - Electronic gearbox system (6-speed) - Engine relay unit
F14 15 A
Air conditioning - Instrument panel - Rev counter - Airbags and pretensioners - Trailer unit -
Bluetooth
®
telephone
F15 30 A Central locking - Deadlocking
F16 - SHUNT
F17 40 A Heated rear screen
149
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Fuses in the engine
compartment
Access to the fuses
Detach and remove the cover.
Access to the second dashboard
fusebox
After any operation on the fuses
in the fusebox, check that the
fusebox cover is put back cor-
rectly for their protection.
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F36 30 A Hi-Fi amplifi er
F37 30 A Driver’s electric seat
F39 20 A Heated seats
After any operation, carefully re-
fi t the cover. If the cover is not
correctly positioned or not prop-
erly closed, this could cause se-
rious problems on your vehicle.
For the same reason, take care
not to spill any liquid in the fuse-
box.
All work on the maxi-fuses,
which are located in these
fuseboxes and which give
extra protection, must be carried
out by CITROËN technicians.
149
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Fuses in the engine
compartment
Access to the fuses
Detach and remove the cover.
Access to the second dashboard
fusebox
After any operation on the fuses
in the fusebox, check that the
fusebox cover is put back cor-
rectly for their protection.
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F36 30 A Hi-Fi amplifi er
F37 30 A Driver’s electric seat
F39 20 A Heated seats
After any operation, carefully re-
fi t the cover. If the cover is not
correctly positioned or not prop-
erly closed, this could cause se-
rious problems on your vehicle.
For the same reason, take care
not to spill any liquid in the fuse-
box.
All work on the maxi-fuses,
which are located in these
fuseboxes and which give
extra protection, must be carried
out by CITROËN technicians.
150
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 20 A Engine management control unit - Cooling fan
F2 15 A Horn
F3 10 A Front and rear screen wash
F4 20 A Headlamp wash
F5 15 A Fuel pump
F6 10 A Automatic gearbox - Xenon headlamps - Directional headlamps - Canister discharge electrovalve
F7 10 A ABS control unit/ESP control unit - Power steering
F8 25 A Starter motor
F9 10 A Additional heating unit (Diesel) - Engine coolant level switch
F10 30 A
Engine electrovalve - Water in Diesel sensor - Engine management control unit - Injectors -
Ignition coil - Oxygen sensor - Canister discharge electrovalve (1.4i 16V and 1.6i 16V
engines)
F11 40 A Air blower - Air conditioning
F12 30 A Windscreen wipe
F13 40 A Built-in Systems Interface (BSI)
F14 - Not used
F15 10 A Right-hand main beam
F16 10 A Left-hand main beam
F17 15 A Left-hand dipped beam
F18 15 A Right-hand dipped beam
F19 15 A Engine management control unit (1.4i 16V et 1.6i 16V engines)
F20 10 A Engine electrovalve
F21 5 A Cooling fan relay - Valvetronic
151
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Fuses on the battery
After any operation, carefully re-
fi t the cover. If the cover is not
correctly positioned or not prop-
erly closed, this could cause se-
rious problems on your vehicle.
For the same reason, take care
not to spill any liquid in the fuse-
box.
Table of fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
F1 - Not used
F 2 * 30 A Gearbox (electronic system or automatic)
F3 - Not used
F4 - Not used
F5 * 80 A Power steering electropump assembly
F6 * 70 A Heating unit (Diesel)
F7 * 100 A Switching and protection unit
F8 - Not used
F9 * 30 A Electronic gearbox system electropump assembly
F10 *
30 A Valvetronic electric motor
Access to the fuses
Detach and remove the cover.
* The maxi-fuses provide additional
protection for the electrical sys-
tems. All work on these fuses must
be carried out by CITROËN techni-
cians.
152
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Table of maxi-fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions
MF1 * 30 A/50 A Cooling fan
MF2 * 30 A ABS/ESP pump supply
MF3 * 50 A ABS/ESP control unit
MF4 * 80 A Built-in systems interface
MF5 * 80 A Built-in systems interface
MF6 * 80 A Dashboard fusebox
MF7 * 20 A Diagnostic socket/PEF additive pump
MF8 * - Not used
153
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
BATTERY
Procedure for charging your battery
when it is fl at or for starting the en-
gine using another battery.
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the
bonnet.
To gain access to it:
open the bonnet using the interi-
or release lever, then the exterior
safety catch,
secure the bonnet stay,
remove the plastic cover to gain
access to the two terminals,
unclip the fusebox to remove the
battery, if necessary.
Charging the battery using a
battery charger
Disconnect the battery from the
vehicle.
Follow the instructions for use
provided by the manufacturer of
the charger.
Reconnect starting with the neg-
ative terminal (-).
Check that the terminals and
connectors are clean. If they are
covered with sulphate (whitish or
greenish deposit), remove them
and clean them.
Starting using another
battery
The batteries contain harm-
ful substances such as sul-
phuric acid and lead. They
must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must not, in
any circumstances, be discarded
with household waste.
Take used remote control batteries
and vehicle batteries to a special
collection point.
It is advisable to disconnect the
battery if the vehicle is to be left
unused for more than one month.
Connect the red cable to the posi-
tive terminal (+) of the fl at battery A ,
then to the positive terminal (+) of
the slave battery B .
Connect one end of the green or
black cable to the negative ter-
minal (-) of the slave battery B .
Operate the starter, let the en-
gine run.
Wait until the engine returns to
idle and disconnect the cables.
154
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
ENERGY ECONOMY MODE
System which manages the duration
of use of certain functions to con-
serve a suffi cient level of charge in
the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you
can still use functions such as the
audio and telematics system, wind-
screen wipers, dipped beam head-
lamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined duration of thir-
ty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
Once the thirty minutes are over, a
message appears on the multi-function
screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated au-
tomatically next time the vehicle is
driven.
In order to resume the use of these
functions immediately, start the en-
gine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes to use
the equipment for an equivalent
duration,
- for more than ten minutes to use
the equipment for approximately
thirty minutes.
A fl at battery prevents the en-
gine from starting (refer to the
corresponding paragraph).
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the bat-
tery, switch on the ignition and wait
1 minute before starting to permit
initialisation of the electronic sys-
tems. However, if problems are en-
countered following this operation,
contact a CITROËN dealer.
Referring to the corresponding sec-
tion, you must yourself reinitialise
(depending on equipment):
- the remote control key,
- the one-touch electric windows,
- the settings of the multifunction
screen,
- the audio equipment radio sta-
tions,
- the GPS satellite navigation
system.
Do not disconnect the ter-
minals while the engine is
running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals fi rst.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if it is fi tted with a 6-speed
electronic gearbox system.
Before disconnecting the
battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off
the ignition before disconnecting
the battery.
Close the windows and the doors
before disconnecting the battery.
154
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
ENERGY ECONOMY MODE
System which manages the duration
of use of certain functions to con-
serve a suffi cient level of charge in
the battery.
After the engine has stopped, you
can still use functions such as the
audio and telematics system, wind-
screen wipers, dipped beam head-
lamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a
maximum combined duration of thir-
ty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
Once the thirty minutes are over, a
message appears on the multi-function
screen indicating that the vehicle has
switched to economy mode and the
active functions are put on standby.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated au-
tomatically next time the vehicle is
driven.
In order to resume the use of these
functions immediately, start the en-
gine and let it run:
- for less than ten minutes to use
the equipment for an equivalent
duration,
- for more than ten minutes to use
the equipment for approximately
thirty minutes.
A fl at battery prevents the en-
gine from starting (refer to the
corresponding paragraph).
Following reconnection of the
battery
Following reconnection of the bat-
tery, switch on the ignition and wait
1 minute before starting to permit
initialisation of the electronic sys-
tems. However, if problems are en-
countered following this operation,
contact a CITROËN dealer.
Referring to the corresponding sec-
tion, you must yourself reinitialise
(depending on equipment):
- the remote control key,
- the one-touch electric windows,
- the settings of the multifunction
screen,
- the audio equipment radio sta-
tions,
- the GPS satellite navigation
system.
Do not disconnect the ter-
minals while the engine is
running.
Do not charge the batteries without
disconnecting the terminals fi rst.
Do not push the vehicle to start the
engine if it is fi tted with a 6-speed
electronic gearbox system.
Before disconnecting the
battery
Wait 2 minutes after switching off
the ignition before disconnecting
the battery.
Close the windows and the doors
before disconnecting the battery.
155
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
TOWING THE VEHICLE
Procedure for having your vehicle
towed or for towing another vehicle
using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tools
The tools are located under the boot
fl oor.
To gain access to them:
open the boot,
lift up the fl oor,
detach and remove the holder
containing the tools.
Towing your vehicle
On the front bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing at the top left
and pulling at the right.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Attach the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning
lamps on the towed vehicle.
Place the gear lever in neutral
(position N on the electronic
gearbox or automatic gearbox).
Towing another vehicle
On the rear bumper, unclip the
cover by pressing at the bottom
at pulling at the top.
Screw the towing eye in fully.
Attach the towing bar.
Switch on the hazard warning
lamps on the towed vehicle.
Failure to observe this special con-
dition could result in damage to
certain braking components and
the absence of braking assistance
the next time the engine is started.
When towing with all four wheels on
the ground, always use a towing bar.
When towing with only two wheels
on the ground, always use profes-
sional lifting equipment.
When towing with the engine off,
there is no longer any braking or
steering assistance.
156
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
TOWING A TRAILER,
A CARAVAN, ETC.
Towbar suitable for the attachment
of a trailer or caravan with additional
lighting and signalling.
Your vehicle is primarily designed
for transporting people and luggage,
but it may also be used for towing a
trailer.
If the trailer is not fi tted by
a CITROËN dealer, it is im-
perative that it is fi tted us-
ing the electrical pre-equipment
installed at the rear of the vehicle,
in accordance with the manufactur-
er's instructions.
Driving advice
Distribution of loads
Distribute the load in the trailer
so that the heaviest items are as
close as possible to the axle and
the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without ex-
ceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude,
thus reducing engine performance.
Above 1 000 metres, the maximum
towing load must be reduced by 10 %
and so on for every 1 000 metres of
altitude.
Refer to the "Technical Data" section
for details of the weights and towing
loads which apply to your vehicle.
Side wind
Take into account the increased
sensitivity to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases
the temperature of the coolant.
As the fan is electrically controlled,
its cooling capacity is not dependent
on the engine speed.
To lower the engine speed, reduce
your speed.
The maximum towing load on a long
slope depends on the gradient and
the ambient temperature.
In all cases, pay attention to the
coolant temperature.
If the warning lamp and
the STOP warning lamp
come on, stop the vehicle
and switch off the engine
as soon as possible.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking
distance.
Tyres
Check the tyre pressures of the
towing vehicle and of the trailer,
observing the recommended
pressures.
Lighting
Check the electrical lighting and
signalling on the trailer.
The rear parking sensors will be de-
activated automatically if a genuine
CITROËN towbar is used.
We recommend the use of genuine
CITROËN towbars and their har-
nesses that have been tested and
approved from the design stage
of your vehicle, and that the fi t-
ting of the towbar is entrusted to a
CITROËN dealer.
Driving with a trailer subjects the
towing vehicle to more signifi cant
stress and its driver must be particu-
larly careful.
157
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
ROOF BARS
The design of your vehicle requires
the use of roof bars and roof box-
es that are tested and approved by
CITROËN, for your safety and to avoid
damage to the roof and tailgate
Regardless of the type of loading
equipment to be transported on the
roof (roof box, bicycle carrier, ski
carrier...), you must add transverse
roof bars.
Recommendations
Distribute your load evenly, avoid-
ing overloading on one side.
Arrange the heaviest part of the
load as close as possible to the
roof.
Anchor the load securely and
signal if any part of it is over-
hanging.
Drive gently, as the vehicle will
be more liable to the effects of
side winds (vehicle stability may
be altered).
Remove the roof bars as soon
as they are no longer needed.
Bicycle carrier
The installation of a bicycle carrier
on the tailgate of the 3-door model is
strictly prohibited.
Maximum load that can be
distributed on the roof bars
(for a loading height not ex-
ceeding 40 cm; except bicycle car-
rier): 80 kg.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt
your speed to the profi le of the road
to avoid damaging the roof bars
and the fi xings on the roof.
Please refer to national legislation
in order to comply with the regula-
tions concerning the transportation
of objects which are longer than
the vehicle.
* According to country.
VERY COLD CLIMATE
SCREEN *
Removable protective screen which
prevents the accumulation of snow
at the radiator cooling fan.
Fitting
Offer up the very cold climate
screen to the front of the lower
section of the front bumper.
Press around its edge to engage
its fi xing clips one by one.
Removal
Use a screwdriver as a lever to
release each fi xing clip in turn.
Do not forget to remove the very
cold climate screen:
- when the ambient temperature
exceeds 10 °C,
- when towing,
-
at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
158
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
Radio option
See the separate instruction booklet
in the vehicle document pack.
Fitting front and rear
loudspeakers
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
On the dashboard
Two tweeters located at each end of
the dashboard:
detach and pull off the grille,
connect the tweeters,
fi t them on the grille, rotating
them a quarter turn,
refi t the grilles.
RADIO PRE-EQUIPMENT
Radio connections
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
159
XI
P R A C T I C A L I N F O R M A T I O N
The fi tting of electrical
equipment or accessories
which are not recommend-
ed by CITROËN may result in a
failure of your vehicle's electronic
system and excess consumption.
Please note this specifi c warn-
ing. You are advised to contact a
CITROËN representative to be
shown the range of recommended
equipment and accessories.
ACCESSORIES
A wide range of accessories and
genuine parts is offered by the
CITROËN network.
These accessories and parts have
been tested and approved for reli-
ability and safety.
They are all adapted to your vehicle
and benefi t from CITROËN's recom-
mendation and warranty.
This product range is structured
around 5 categories:
"Comfort and leisure": mats * , boot
tray, sun blinds, fragrance cartridg-
es, roof bars, storage tray under rear
shelf, armrest, telephone support,
child seats and booster cushions...
"Protection": anti-theft alarm,
breathalyser, fi rst aid kit, warning
triangle, high visibility safety jack-
et, snow chains, non-skid covers,
foglamps kit, rear parking sensors...
"Navigation and communication":
Bluetooth
®
hands-free system, audio
equipment, portable satellite naviga-
tion system, CD changer, auxiliary
cable for connecting a portable MP3
player, USB Box, speakers...
"Personalisation": seat covers,
alloy wheels, wheel trims, standard
mud fl aps, style mud fl aps, door de-
fl ectors, sill protectors, aluminium
interior trim kit, anti-scratch protec-
tors under handles...
"Accessories": windscreen wash
fl uid, interior and exterior cleaning
and maintenance products, body-
work touch-up aerosol and pen...
Depending on the country in which
the vehicle is sold, it may be com-
pulsory to have a high visibility safe-
ty jacket, warning triangle and spare
bulbs available in the vehicle.
* To avoid any risk of jamming of
the pedals:
- ensure that the mat is posi-
tioned and secured correctly,
- never fi t one mat on top of an-
other.
160
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
KFU-C NFU-C NFU-F 5FW-C 5FW-F 5FX-H 5FT-F NFU-C/FF
PETROL ENGINES
1.4 L 16V
1.6 L 16V 110 hp 1.6 L 16VTi 120 hp
1.6 L THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 L THP
16V 140 hp
1.6 L 16V
110 hp
BioFlex
Cubic capacity (cc)
1 360 1 587 1 598 1 598 1 587
Bore x stroke (mm)
75 x 77 78.5 x 82 77 x 85.8 77 x 85.8 78.5 x 82
EU standard maximum power (kW) 65 80 88 110 103 80 82
Maximum power engine speed (rpm)
5 250 5 800 6 000 5 800 6 000 5 800
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 133 147 160 240 147 153
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm)
3 250 4 000 4 250 1 400 4 000
Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded
Unleaded
E85
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
Auto.
(4-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement)
3.15 3.25 4.25 4.25 4.25 3.25
Gearbox - Final drive
- 1.9 1.9 - 1.9 - 1.9
LA...: 3-door.
LC...: 5-door.
LG...: 3-door "Enterprise".
LR...: 5-door "Enterprise".
161
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (5-DOOR) in kg
Petrol engines 1.4 L 16V
1.6 L 16V
110 hp
1.6 L 16VTi
120 hp
1.6 L THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 L THP
16V 140 hp
1.6 L 16V
BioFlex
Gearboxes Manual
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Auto. Manual Auto. Manual
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
KFU-C NFU-C NFU-F 5FW-C 5FW-F 5FX-H 5FT-F NFU-C/FF
- Unladen weight 1 182 1 200 1 274 1 220 1 273 1 276 1 290 1 200
- Kerb weight 1 257 1 275 1 349 1 295 1 348 1 351 1 365 1 275
- Payload 520 532 520 511 488 487 486 532
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 702 1 732 1 794 1 731 1 761 1 763 1 776 1 732
- Gross train weight (GTW) 2 902 2 932 2 994 3 031 3 031 3 163 3 076 2 932
- Braked trailer
(within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 200 1 200 1 300 1 270 1 400 1 300 1 200
on an 8 % or 10 % gradient 1 200 1 200 1 300 1 270 1 400 1 300 1 200
on a gradient of less than 8 % 1 500 1 400 1 400 1 300 1 500 1 350 1 400
- Unbraked trailer 628 637 674 645 670 645 680 637
- Recommended nose weight 63 61 62 65 70 70 61
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
162
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (3-DOOR) in kg
Petrol engines 1.4 L 16V 1.6 L 16V 110 hp 1.6 L 16VTi 120 hp
1.6 L THP
16V 150 hp
1.6 L 16V
BioFlex
Gearboxes Manual Manual Auto. Manual Auto. Manual Manual
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
KFU-C NFU-C NFU-F 5FW-C 5FW-F 5FX-H NFU-C/FF
- Unladen weight 1 181 1 200 1 278 1 217 1 273 1 271 1 200
- Kerb weight 1 256 1 275 1 353 1 292 1 348 1 346 1 275
- Payload 520 520 520 510 484 483 520
- Gross vehicle
weight (GVW)
1 701 1 720 1 798 1 727 1 757 1 754 1 720
- Gross train
weight (GTW)
2 901 2 920 2 998 3 027 3 027 3 154 2 920
- Braked trailer
(within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 200 1 200 1 300 1 270 1 400 1 200
on an 8 % or 10 % gradient 1 200 1 200 1 300 1 270 1 400 1 200
on a gradient of less than 8 % 1 500 1 400 1 400 1 300 1 500 1 400
- Unbraked trailer 628 637 676 645 670 645 637
- Recommended nose weight 63 61 63 65 65 70 61
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
163
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
MODELS: ENGINES AND GEARBOXES
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
9HX-C 9HV-C
9HY-B
9HY-C
9HZ-C 9HZ-H/P RHR-J RHF-8
DIESEL ENGINES
1.6 L HDi
16V 92 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V 110 hp
2 L HDi
16V 138 hp
2 L HDi
16V 140 hp
Cubic capacity (cc) 1 560 1 560 1 997 1 997
Bore x stroke (mm) 75 x 88.3 75 x 88.3 85 x 88 85 x 88
EU standard maximum power (kW) 66 66.2 80 100 103
Maximum power engine speed (rpm)
4 000 4 000 4 000 4 000
EU standard maximum torque (Nm) 215 240 320 320
Maximum torque engine speed (rpm)
1 750 1 750 2 000 2 000
Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel
Catalytic converter Yes Yes Yes Yes
Particle emission fi lter (PEF) No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
GEARBOXES
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Manual
(5-speed)
Electronic
Gearbox System
(6-speed)
Auto.
(6-speed)
Manual
(6-speed)
OIL CAPACITIES (in litres)
Engine (with fi lter replacement) 3.85 3.85 3.85 3.85 5.3 5.3
Gearbox - Final drive 1.9 1.9 1.9 - - 2.4
LA...: 3-door.
LC...: 5-door.
LG...: 3-door "Enterprise".
LR...: 5-door "Enterprise".
164
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (5-DOOR) in kg
Diesel engines
1.6 L HDi
16V 92 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
92 hp PEF
1.6 L HDi
16V 110 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
110 hp PEF
2 L HDi 16V
138 hp
2 L HDi 16V
140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Manual Manual
Electronic
Gearbox System
Auto. Manual
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
9HX-C 9HV-C
9HY-B
9HY-C
9HZ-C 9HZ-H/P RHR-J RHF-8
- Unladen weight 1 257 1 280 1 270 1 280 1 293 1 416 1 381
- Kerb weight 1 332 1 355 1 345 1 355 1 368 1 491 1 456
- Payload 520 520 530 520 507 464 468
- Gross vehicle weight (GVW) 1 777 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 880 1 849
- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 077 3 100 3 100 3 100 3 350 3 449
- Braked trailer
(within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 500
on an 8 % or 10 % gradient 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 500
on a gradient of less than 8 % 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 800
- Unbraked trailer 666 677 672 677 675 740 728
- Recommended nose weight 66 66 66 66 65 70 73
165
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (3-DOOR) in kg
Diesel engines
1.6 L HDi
16V 92 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
92 hp PEF
1.6 L HDi
16V 110 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
110 hp PEF
2 L HDi 16V
138 hp
2 L HDi 16V
140 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Manual Manual
Electronic
Gearbox System
Auto. Manual
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
9HX-C 9HV-C
9HY-B
9HY-C
9HZ-C 9HZ-H/P RHR-J RHF-8
- Unladen weight 1 255 1 279 1 269 1 279 1 293 1 410 1 379
- Kerb weight 1 330 1 354 1 344 1 354 1 368 1 485 1 454
- Payload 520 520 521 520 497 470 456
- Gross vehicle
weight (GVW)
1 775 1 799 1 790 1 799 1 790 1 880 1 835
- Gross train weight (GTW) 3 075 3 099 3 090 3 099 3 090 3 450 3 335
- Braked trailer
(within GTW limit)
on a 10 % or 12 % gradient 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 500
on an 8 % or 10 % gradient 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 500
on a gradient of less than 8 % 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 300 1 570 1 800
- Unbraked trailer 665 677 672 677 675 740 727
- Recommended nose weight 66 66 66 66 65 70 73
The GTW and towed load values indicated apply up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned
must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude.
The speed of a towing vehicle must not exceed 100 km/h (approx. 60 mph) (comply with the legislation in force in your
country).
High exterior temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle in order to protect the engine; when
the exterior temperature is higher than 37 °C, limit the weight towed.
166
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
WEIGHTS AND TOWED LOADS (C4 VAN * ) in kg
MODELS: 3-door 5-door
Diesel engines
1.6 L HDi 16V
92 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
110 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
92 hp
1.6 L HDi 16V
92 hp PEF
1.6 L HDi 16V
110 hp
Gearboxes Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual
Model codes:
LA... LC... LG... LR...
9HX-C
9HY-B
9HY-C
9HX-C 9HV-C
9HY-B
9HY-C
French fi scal rating 6 6 6 6 6
Weights (kg)
Unladen 1 244 1 276 1 247 1 275 1 265
Gross Vehicle Weight 1 770 1 800 1 780 1 805 1 790
Payload (including driver) 526 524 533 530 525
Gross Train Weight 3 070 3 100 3 080 3 080 3 090
Trailer weight with brakes
(within Gross Train Weight)
1 300 1 300 1 300 1 275 1 300
Trailer weight without brakes 655 675 660 670 670
Recommended nose weight 52 52 52 65 52
* Applicable to all countries, except France and Overseas France. For France and DOM-TOM countries, refer to the table
on the "Technical Specifi cations - Weights" page.
167
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
3-door
model
5-door
model
A 2.608
B 4.288 4.275
C 0.950
D 0.730 0.717
E 1.502/1.510
F 1.497/1.505
G 1.769 1.773
H 1.456/1.496
I 1.989
DIMENSIONS (IN METRES)
168
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
3-door model
A 0.903/1.067
B 0.513/0.518
C 0.794
D 1.034
E 0.791
F 1.385
G 0.725
H 0.791
5-door model
A 0.862/1.044
B 0.492/0.515
C 0.794
D 1.034
E 0.791
F 1.385
G 0.725
H 0.791
169
XII
T E C H N I C A L D A T A
IDENTIFICATION MARKINGS
Various visible marking components
for vehicle identifi cation and searches.
The vehicle identifi cation number
is also indicated on the registration
document.
All CITROËN genuine replacement
parts are available exclusively within
the dealer network.
For your safety and in order to re-
main within the terms of the war-
ranty, you are advised to use only
CITROËN replacement parts .
A. Manufacturer’s label
1. EU type approval number.
2. Vehicle Identifi cation Number
(VIN).
3. Gross vehicle weight.
4. Gross train weight.
5. Maximum weight on front axle.
6. Maximum weight on rear axle.
B. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Located on bodywork and behind
windscreen.
C. Paint colour code
Tyre reference
Tyre pressures
Located on the driver's door interior
pillar.
Use the tyre pressures recom-
mended by CITROËN.
Check the tyre pressures when the
tyres are cold, on a frequent basis.
Never reduce the pressure of a hot
tyre.
If replacing your tyres, it is essen-
tial to use the tyre sizes that are
recommended for your vehicle.
172
CITROËN ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER CALL
* These services and options are subject to conditions and availability.
CONSULTING THE SERVICES
EMERGENCY CALL
Press this button to gain access to the
CITROËN services * .
Press this button to ga
ss this
Select "Customer call" to request
any information about the CITROËN
marque.
Select "CITROËN Assistance" to
make a breakdown assistance call.
In an emergency, press the SOS
button until a CONFIRMATION/
CANCELLATION screen is displayed.
A call is made * directly to CITROËN
CANCELLATION screen is displayed.
isplaye
Emergency which receives locating
information from the vehicle and
can send a detailed alert to the
appropriate emergency services. In
countries where the call centre is not
operational, the call is directed to the
national emergency services (112).
* This service is subject to conditions and availability.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
* This service is subject to cond
If necessary, the internal telephone is activated automa
utomatically to
make an emergency call.
In order for an emergency call to be made, a valid SIM c
SIM card must be
inserted.
EMERGENCY OR ASSISTANCE CALL using NaviDrive
173
173
NaviDrive
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/TELEPHONE
JUKEBOX FUNCTION (10 GB)/GPS (EUROPE)
The NaviDrive is coded in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for confi guration of the
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
le. If it i
system.
For safety reasons, the driver should only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention only while
the vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the NaviDrive switches off
after a few minutes.
CONTENTS
01 First steps p.
02 Steering mounted controls p.
03 Screen and general menu p.
04 Navigation - Guidance p.
05 Traffi c information p.
06 Audio/Video p.
07 Telephone p.
08 Voice commands p.
09 Confi guration p.
10 Screen menu map p.
Frequently asked questions p.
174
175
176
179
189
192
201
205
206
20 7
212
174
2
8
16
18 17
7
11
14 3
5 9
415
12
13
6
1
10
01
FIRST STEPS
1.
On/Off and Volume adjustment.
2.
Selection of the source: radio, Jukebox, CD and auxiliary
(AUX, if activated on the Confi guration menu).
Long press: CD copy to hard disk.
3.
Audio option adjustments: front/rear, left/right balance,
loudness, sound ambiences.
4.
Display the list of local radio stations, of the tracks on the
CD or of the MP3/USB/Jukebox directories.
Long press: update the local radio stations.
5.
Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.
Selection of the previous/next CD, MP3, USB or Jukebox
track.
Long press: fast forward and backward play.
6.
Selection of wavebands FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
7.
TA (Traffi c Announcement) function on/off.
Long press: access to the PTY
(radio Programme TYpes) mode.
8.
Ejection of the CD.
9.
SIM card slot.
10.
Keypad for entering descriptions by successive presses.
11.
Access to the "CITROËN" services menu.
12.
Selection and confi rmation.
13.
Selection of the previous/next MP3/USB/Jukebox directory.
14.
Cancellation of the current operation.
Long press: return to the current application.
15.
Display the general menu.
16.
Modifi cation of the screen display. Long press:
reinitialisation of the system.
17.
Selection of the display on the screen between modes:
TRIP, TEL, NAV and AUDIO.
18.
Long press on the SOS button: emergency call.
175
02
4
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
1.
Volume increase.
2.
Volume decrease.
3.
Mute.
4.
RADIO: selection of the previous or next stored station.
MP3/JUKEBOX: selection of the previous or next directory
CD CHANGER: selection of the previous or next CD.
5.
RADIO: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD/MP3/JUKEBOX/CD CHANGER:
selection of the next track.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:
continuous press: fast forwards play.
1.
Displays the main screen.
2.
Selection of the mode displayed (TRIP, TEL, NAV or
AUDIO).
3.
Abandon the operation in progress
and return to the previous display.
4.
Navigation through the menus.
5.
Confi rmation of the function selected.
1.
Short press:
Activation of the voice recognition.
2.
WHEN THE TELEPHONE IS NOT IN USE:
Long press: access to the telephone menu
(phone book, call list, ...).
INCOMING CALL:
Short press to accept.
Long press to reject the call.
CALL IN PROGRESS:
Short press to hang up.
Long press to access the telephone menu.
3.
Personalisation:
Short press: confi rmation of the selection made using the dial.
4.
Rotation:
Move around the phone book, the call list.
Selection of personalisation.
176
03
°
> COLOUR SCREEN
This displays the following information, via the audio control panel:
- time,
- date,
- ambient temperature (if there is a risk of ice, you are warned by a
message),
- audio source displays (radio, CD, jukebox, ...),
- telematic system displays (telephone, services, ...),
- check of openings (doors, boot, ...),
- warning messages (e.g.: "Fuel level low") and vehicle function status
messages (e.g.: "Auto lighting activated") displayed temporarily,
- trip computer information,
- GPS (Europe) satellite navigation system information.
The system uses the complete and detailed NAVTEQ maps installed directly on the equipment's hard disk.
Updates of the maps of the UK and of the other European countries, offered by our partner NAVTEQ, are available from the CITROËN network.
The system uses the complete and detailed NAVTEQ maps installed directly on the equipment's hard disk.
Screen confi guration: refer to the section - Screen menu map.
Telephone
Orange
Time:
Date:
177
03
SCREEN AND MAIN MENU
MAP:
orientation, details, display.
AUDIO FUNCTIONS:
radio, CD, Jukebox, options.
For maintenance of the
display, the use of a
soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is
recommended without any
additional product.
TELEMATIC:
telephone, directory, SMS.
CONFIGURATION:
vehicle, display, time,
languages, voice, auxiliary
socket (AUX) parameters.
so
VIDEO:
activation, parameters.
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS:
warnings log, status of the
functions.
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE:
GPS, stages, options.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION:
TMC information,
messages.
Long press on MENU: help.
178
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03
SCREEN AND MAIN MENU
Press the OK dial to access short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen.
INTERNAL TELEPHONE:
call list
dial
phone book
voice mail
NAVIGATION (IF NAVIGATION IS IN PROGRESS):
resume/stop guidance
divert route
route type
consult traffi c info
zoom/scroll map
TRIP COMPUTER:
alert log
status of functions
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE:
call list
call
phone book
private mode/hands-free mode
place call on hold/resume call
CD (MP3 OR AUDIO):
copy CD to JBX/stop copy
activate/deactivate Introscan
activate/deactivate random play
activate/deactivate repeat
RADIO:
enter a frequency
activate/deactivate RDS
activate/deactivate REG mode
hide/display "Radio Text"
JUKEBOX:
select playlist
activate/deactivate Introscan
activate/deactivate random play
activate/deactivate repeat
USB:
copy USB to JBX/stop copy
eject USB
activate/deactivate Introscan
activate/deactivate random play
activate/deactivate repeat
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
IN "ZOOM/SCROLL" MODE:
position info
select as destination
select as stage
store this position
exit MAP mode
guidance option
179
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
7
7
4
4
6
6
8
8
04
SELECTING A DESTINATION
Tip: for a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the "Screen menu map" part of this section.
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
DESTINATION CHOICE function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the ENTER
AN ADDRESS function.
When the country has been selected,
turn the dial and select the TOWN
function.
TOWN
ENTER AN ADDRESS
DESTINATION CHOICE
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
180
9
11
11
12
12
13
13
15
15
10
10
14
14
04
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the letters of
the town one by one confi rming each
time by pressing the dial.
Turn the dial and select OK.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
To speed up the process, the POST CODE can be
entered instead of the name of the town.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters and
digits and "*" to correct (limit of 5 characters).
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Select OK on the ENTER AN
ADDRESS page.
Repeat steps 8 to 12 for the ROAD and N° functions.
OK
OK
Select the STORE function to record the address entered in a
directory record and press the dial to confi rm the selection.
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the
vicinity (hotels, various businesses, airports, ...).
STORE
PARIS
POI
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
181
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
9
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
04
ADDING A STAGE
During guidance, press the MENU
button.
Turn the dial and select the
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
JOURNEY LEGS AND ROUTE
function.
JOURNEY LEGS AND ROUTE
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm the order of the stages.
When the new address has been
entered, select OK and press the dial
to confi rm.
Enter for example a new address.
Select the ADD A STAGE function
(9 stages maximum) and press the
dial to confi rm.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Select STRICT (the stage must be completed in order to continue to
the next destination) or PROXIMITY then press the dial to confi rm.
ENTER AN ADDRESS
ADD A STAGE
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
182
6
6
8
8
7
7
5
5
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
04
GUIDANCE SPEECH SYNTHESIS
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
During announcements, the volume of each speech synthesis
function (guidance, traffi c information...) can be adjusted directly
using the volume adjustment control.
Select the ADJUST SPEECH
SYNTHESIS function and press the
dial to confi rm.
Press the dial then adjust the volume
of the speech synthesis or select the
DEACTIVATE function and press the
dial to confi rm.
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm.
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
GUIDANCE OPTIONS function.
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
ADJUST SPEECH SYNTHESIS
DEACTIVATE
OK
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The volume of the Risk Areas POI alerts can only be adjusted during the alert using the
volume adjustment control.
183
04
List of POI
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
184
04
1
2
3
4
5
UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs
Select MAP and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Press the MENU button.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
DISPLAYING THE RISK AREAS POIs
Select MAP DETAILS and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Select TRANSPORT AND
AUTOMOBILES and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Tick "Risk Areas" and confi rm by
pressing OK.
The detailed procedure is available from CITROËN deal
dealers.
185
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
04
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
The route presented depends directly on the guidance options.
Changing these options may completely change the route.
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the
NAVIGATION GUIDANCE function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
GUIDANCE OPTIONS function.
Turn the dial and select the DEFINE
CALCULATION CRITERIA function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
DISTANCE/TIME
DEFINE CALCULATION CRITERIA
Turn the dial and select, for example,
the DISTANCE/TIME function.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
186
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
2
2
1
1
3
3
04
Turn the dial and select the TRAFFIC
INFO function if you wish to receive
the TRAFFIC INFO announcements.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm.
TRAFFIC INFO
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Tick this box for optimum operation of the traffi c information,
diversions will be suggested.
OK
SETTING RISK AREAS
ALERT PARAMETERS
Turn the dial and select the SET RISK
AREAS PARAMETERS function, then
press the dial to confi rm the warning
message. Press the dial to confi rm
the selection.
Select:
- visual warnings,
- audible warnings with an
announcement duration
(in seconds),
-
warn during guidance only, then select
OK and press the dial to confi rm.
These functions are only available if the risk areas have been
downloaded and installed on the system.
Repeat steps 1 to 5 of the guidance option.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
The volume of the Risk Areas POI alerts can only be adjusted during the alert.
SET RISK AREAS PARAMETERS
OK
187
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
04
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the MAP
function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the MAP
DETAILS function.
Permits selection of the services
which can be seen on the map
(hotels, restaurants, risk areas...).
ACTIONS ON THE MAP
MAP DETAILS
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
orientation of your choice.
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 then turn the dial
and select the MAP ORIENTATION
function.
MAP ORIENTATION
MAP ORIENTATION
3D VIEW
OK
NORTH DIRECTION
VEHICLE DIRECTION
For improved visibility, beyond the scale of 10 km, the map
automatically switches to North Orientation.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
188
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
04
Press the MENU button.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the MAP
function.
Turn the dial and select the MAP IN
WINDOW or FULL SCREEN MAP tab.
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the DISPLAY
MAP function.
DISPLAYING THE MAP IN A WINDOW OR
IN FULL SCREEN MODE
DISPLAY MAP
FULL SCREEN MAP
OK
MAP IN WINDOW
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
189
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
05
CONFIGURING THE FILTERING OF
TMC ANNOUNCEMENTS
The TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages provide information relating to the traffi c and the
weather conditions, received in real time and communicated to the driver in the form of audible
announcements and icons on the navigation map.
The guidance system may then suggest a diversion route.
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the TRAFFIC
INFORMATION function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
FILTER TRAFFIC INFORMATION
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Press the dial to confi rm the
selection.
Select the GEOGRAPHIC FILTER
function and press the dial to confi rm.
Turn the dial and select the fi lter of
your choice.
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm.
GEOGRAPHIC FILTER
AROUND THE VEHICLE
ON THE ROUTE
OK
The fi lters are independent and their results are eliminated.
We recommend:
- a fi lter of 6 miles (10 km) around the vehicle in heavy traffi c,
- a fi lter of 30 miles (50 km) around the vehicle or a fi lter on the
route for motorway journeys.
Turn the dial and select the FILTER
TRAFFIC INFORMATION function.
190
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
5
5
7
7
05
Press the MENU button.
READ MESSAGES
NEW MESSAGE DISPLAY
OK
CONFIGURING THE DISPLAY OF
TMC MESSAGES
We recommend that you do not tick the NEW MESSAGE DISPLAY tab for regions with heavy traffi c.
Turn the dial and select the TRAFFIC
INFORMATION function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the
CONFIGURE MESSAGE
ANNOUNCEMENT function.
Select the READ MESSAGES tab.
The Traffi c Information Messages will
be read by the voice synthesiser.
Select the NEW MESSAGE
DISPLAY tab.
The traffi c information messages
are extended to the fi lters selected
(geographic...) and can also be
displayed when guidance is not active.
CONFIGURE MESSAGE ANNOUNCEMENT
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Select OK and press the dial to confi rm.
191
05
2
1
3
2
1
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, par example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
With the current audio source displayed
on the screen, press the dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives acc
es access to:
Select Traffi c Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confi rm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio
station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report is
transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, Jukebox, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
192
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
06
RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
RADIO.
Press the BAND button to select a
waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
Briefl y press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of the
radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out a
manual search of the radio stations.
Press the LIST button to display
the list of stations received locally
(60 maximum).
To update this list, press for more
than two seconds.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...) may block reception,
including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does
not indicate any failure of the audio equipment.
RDS
Select ACTIVATE FREQUENCY
FOLLOWING (RDS) then press OK.
RDS appears on the display.
Select the FM WAVEBAND
PREFERENCES function then
press OK.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then
press OK.
Press the MENU button.
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative fequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a
journey.
FM WAVEBAND PREFERENCES
ACTIVATE FREQUENCY FOLLOWING (RDS)
193
1
1
2
2
06
AUDIO/VIDEO
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3"
with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
Insert circular compact discs only. Some anti-pirating
systems, on original discs or CDs copied using
a personal recorder, may generate malfunctions
regardless of the quality of the original player.
Insert an audio CD or an MP3 compilation in the player,
play begins automatically.
If the player already contains a disc,
press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select CD to
listen to it.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST button to display
the list of tracks on the CD or of the
directories of the MP3 compilation.
The playing and displaying of an MP3 compilation may depend on
the recording programme and/or the parameter settings used. We
recommend use of the ISO 9660 recording standard.
MP3 CD
PLAYING A CD OR AN MP3 COMPILATION
CD
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
194
2
2
3
3
1
1
5
5
6
6
4
4
06
COPY CD TO JUKEBOX
COMPLETE CD
STOP COPY
OK
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
Select COPY CD TO JUKEBOX and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select COMPLETE CD to copy
the entire CD and press the dial to
confi rm.
To stop the copy, repeat points 2 and 3.
Select STOP COPY and press the dial
to confi rm.
The AUTO CREATION tab automatically copies the CD by default
into an album of the type "album n°...".
The audio or MP3 CD is copied onto the hard disk. Copying may take
up to 20 minutes depending on the duration of the CD. During this
copying phase, it is not possible to listen to the albums previously
recorded on the hard disk or the CDs.
Select the letters one by one and select
OK to confi rm.
If it is not an MP3 CD, the Jukebox automatically compresses
the CD in MP3 format. The compression may take approximately
20 minutes depending on the duration of the CD. During this
compression phase, it is possible to listen to the CD or to albums
previously recorded on the hard disk.
A long press on the SOURCE button starts the copying of the CD.
It is not possible to copy fi les from the Jukebox to a CD.
The STOP THE CD COPY action does not delete the fi les which
have already been transferred onto the jukebox hard disk.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS then select
CD and press the dial to confi rm.
Insert an audio CD or an MP3
compilation and press the MENU
button.
JUKEBOX
COPYING A CD ONTO THE HARD DISK
AUDIO/VIDEO
195
1
1
1
1
2
2
06
Do not connect a hard drive or USB equipment other than USB
sticks in FAT 16 or FAT 32 format (NTFS not supported). This could
damage your installation.
Connect the stick to the port, directly or using a lead.
If the audio equipment is switched on, the USB source
is detected as soon as it is connected. Play begins
automatically after a delay which depends on the capacity
of the USB stick.
The fi le formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1 layer 3 only).
The list of compatible equipment is available from CITROËN dealers.
USING THE USB PORT
CONNECTING A USB STICK
The audio fi les are transmitted from a USB stick
to your audio system, to be listened to via the
vehicle's speakers.
Do not connect a hard drive or USB equipment
other than USB sticks in FAT 16 or FAT 32 format
(NTFS not supported). This could damage your
installation.
USB stick (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0):
- the USB sticks must be in FAT or FAT 32
format (NTFS not supported),
- navigation through the fi le base is by means of
the steering wheel controls.
AUDIO/VIDEO
196
2
2
1
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
2
2
3
3
1
1
06
USB
COPY USB TO JUKEBOX
COMPLETE DISC
Select USB and press the dial to
confi rm.
Select COPY USB TO JUKEBOX and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select COMPLETE DISC to copy the
entire USB stick and press the dial to
confi rm.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS and press
the dial to confi rm.
Insert a USB stick in the space provided
and press the MENU button.
JUKEBOX
COPYING AN MP3 USB STICK ONTO THE HARD DISK
If another source is being played,
press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select USB
to play it.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the USB stick.
Press the LIST button to display the list
of folders on the MP3 USB stick.
To eject the USB stick, use the short-cut menu (press OK) or press
the MENU button, select AUDIO FUNCTIONS, USB, then select
EJECT USB.
The playing and displaying of an MP3 compilation may depend on
the parameters programme used.
JUKEBOX
Insert a USB stick in the space provided.
ded.
AUDIO/VIDEO
PLAYING AN MP3 USB STICK
In order to be read, a USB stick must be in FAT 16 or 32 format.
The reader only reads USB sticks.
197
6
6
7
7
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
06
JUKEBOX
RENAME
JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT
Press the MENU button.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the JUKEBOX function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the JUKEBOX MANAGEMENT
function and press the dial to confi rm.
Select the album to be renamed and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the RENAME tab and press the
dial to confi rm.
Turn the dial and select the letters of
the album title one by one confi rming
each time by pressing the dial.
Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the letters of the album title
one by one.
JUKEBOX
RENAMING AN ALBUM
AUDIO/VIDEO
198
8
8
2
2
3
3
1
06
DELETE
OK
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select the
JUKEBOX function.
Press the LIST button.
Turn the dial to select the fi les.
Press the ESC button to return to the fi rst fi le level.
JUKEBOX
Select OK and press the dial to
confi rm.
To rename the tracks of an album, follow the same procedure,
selecting the tracks to be renamed.
Use the ESC button to exit from the list of tracks.
Select the DELETE function to delete an album or
a track from the Jukebox.
JUKEBOX
LISTENING TO THE JUKEBOX
AUDIO/VIDEO
199
1
1
2
2
1
1
3
3
2
2
Press the MENU button then select the CONFIGURATION function,
then SOUNDS, then ACTIVATE AUXILIARY SOURCE to activate
the auxiliary input of the NaviDrive.
Connect the portable equipment
(MP3 player…) to the audio sockets
(white and red, RCA type) located in
the glove box using a JACK/RCA audio
cable.
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
The display and management of the commands is done via the
portable equipment.
It is not possible to copy the fi les onto the hard disk from the auxiliary
input.
USING THE AUXILIARY INPUT (AUX)
JACK/RCA AUDIO CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
AUDIO/VIDEO
CD CHANGER
Insert the CDs in a multi-slot changer
(not MP3 compatible) one by one.
On a single slot changer (MP3
compatible), press LOAD, select the
number of the CD, then insert the CD,
or press and hold LOAD and insert
the CDs one by one.
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select
CD CHANGER.
Press one of the buttons on the
alphanumeric keypad to select the
corresponding CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
It is not possible to copy the fi les onto the hard disk from the CD
changer.
CD CHANGER
PLAYING A CD
200
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
06
ACTIVATE VIDEO MODE
VIDEO PARAMETERS
You can connect video equipment (camcorder, digital camera, DVD player...) to the three audio/video
sockets, located in the glove box.
Turn the dial and select the VIDEO
function.
After connecting the video equipment,
press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the
ACTIVATE VIDEO MODE function to
activate/deactivate the video.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Pressing the "SOURCE" button several times in succession permits
the selection of an audio source other than that of the video.
Pressing the "DARK" button disconnects display of the video.
Turn the dial and select the VIDEO
PARAMETERS function to set the
display format, the brightness, the
contrast and the colours.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
VIDEO MENU
Videos can only be displayed when stationary.
AUDIO/VIDEO
201
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
2
2
07
INTERNAL TELEPHONE
ENTERING THE PIN CODE
Access the slot by pressing the button
using the tip of a pen.
Install the SIM card
in the holder and
then insert it in the
slot.
To remove the SIM card, repeat step 1.
Your SIM card must be installed and removed with the NaviDrive
audio and telematics system switched off and the ignition off.
Enter the PIN code on the keypad.
Confi rm the PIN code by pressing
button #.
PIN CODE
When entering your PIN code, tick the STORE PIN tab to gain
access to the telephone without having to enter this code when it is
used subsequently.
INSTALLING YOUR SIM CARD
(NOT SUPPLIED)
202
3
3
2
2
1
1
4
4
07
The services offered by the telephone depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of
the Bluetooth equipment used. Refer to your telephone's manual and your operator to check which
services you have access to. A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is
available from dealers.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE
For reasons of safety, the driver should only carry out operations
which require prolonged attention when the vehicle is stationary
(pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free kit).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically.
Select BLUETOOTH ACTIVATION
MODE, then ACTIVATED AND
VISIBLE. Press the dial to confi rm
each operation.
Press the MENU button, select
TELEMATICS, then BLUETOOTH
FUNCTIONS. Press the dial to
confi rm each operation.
On your telephone, select the name of
the CITROËN audio/telephone. Enter the
On your telephone, select the name of
r telep
authentication code (0000 by default).
To fi nd and change the name of the CITROËN audio/telephone,
To fi nd and change the name of the CITROËN audio/telephone,
repeat step 2 then select CHANGE AUDIO/TELEPHON
PHONE NAME.
203
07
audiotelephone only.
Once the telephone has been connected, the system can
synchronise the address book and the call list. Repeat step 2 then
select PHONE BOOK SYNCHRONISATION MODE. Select the
synchronisation of your choice and press the dial to confi rm.
The synchronisation may take a few minutes.
To change the telephone connected, repeat step 2 then select LIST
OF MATCHED TELEPHONES and press OK to confi rm. The list of
previously connected telephones (10 maximum) appears. Select the
telephone of your choice, confi rm, then select CONNECT and press
the dial to confi rm.
To change the authentication code, repeat step 2 then select
AUTHENTICATION CODE and save the code of your choice.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A BLUETOOTH
TELEPHONE
204
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
6
6
4
4
07
USING THE TELEPHONE
CALLING A CONTACT
Turn the dial and select the DIAL
function.
Press the PICK UP button to display
the telephone short-cut menu.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Dial the telephone number of your
contact using the alphanumeric
keypad.
Press the PICK UP button to call the
number dialled.
Press the HANG UP button to end
the call.
ACCEPTING OR REFUSING A CALL
Press the PICK UP button to accept
a call.
Press the HANG UP button to refuse
a call.
You can also press and hold the steering wheel
Tel button to access the telephone menu: calls log,
directory, voice mailbox.
To select the telephone used, press MENU, then select TELEMATICS, then BLUETOOTH
FUNCTIONS, then BLUETOOTH ACTIVATION MODE. Then select:
- DEACTIVATED: to use the internal telephone,
- ACTIVATED AND VISIBLE: to use the bluetooth telephone, visible to all telephones,
- ACTIVATED AND NOT VISIBLE: to use the bluetooth telephone, not visible to other telephones,
it is not possible to match a new telephone.
Select CALL LIST or PHONE BOOK and press OK. Select
the number required and confi rm to make the call.
DIAL
205
08
2
2
1
1
Press the voice recognition control to
start the voice recognition.
Say the words one by one and wait
for the audible confi rmation signal
between each word.
The list which follows is exhaustive.
To display the list of available
voice commands, press the voice
recognition control to start the voice
recognition, then say HELP or the
voice recognition command.
For the same operation, press and
hold the MENU button and select the
function VOICE COMMANDS LIST.
VOICE COMMANDS LIST
VOICE COMMANDS
DISPLAYING THE LIST AND USING THEM
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
LEVEL 3
radio
memory
autostore
previous/next
list
1 to 6/*
cd player
Jukebox (if activated)
USB
previous/next track
track number/track
scan
random play
directory (CD-MP3 inserted)
list
1 to 250/*
previous/next
repeat
help/what can I say/cancel
changer
previous/next track
track number/track
scan
repeat
random play
previous/next disc
disc number
list
1 to 20/*
1 to 5/6/*
call/guide to
"Pre-recorded description"
telephone
last number
voice box
voice mail
directory
"Pre-recorded description"
message
display
read
directory
"Pre-recorded description"
navigation
stop/resume
zoom in/out
view
*
destination
vehicle
traffi c info
display
read
display
audio
telephone
trip computer
Navigation
air conditioning
previous/next
stop
delete
yes/no
for all level 1 and 2
* help/what can I say/cancel
for all level 1, 2 or *
VOICE COMMANDS
206
1
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
09
2
2
CONFIGURATION
ADJUSTING THE DATE AND TIME
Press the MENU button.
Turn the dial and select the
CONFIGURATION function.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the DISPLAY
CONFIGURATION function.
Adjust the settings one by one
confi rming by pressing the dial. Next
select the OK tab on the screen then
confi rm.
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
ADJUST THE DATE AND TIME
OK
Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
Turn the dial and select the ADJUST
THE DATE AND TIME function.
The CONFIGURATION function gives access to the colour, brightness and units settings and to voice
commands.
This adjustment must be carried out whenever the battery has been
disconnected.
207
1
2
3
3
2
1
4
4
2
3
4
3
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
3
4
4
4
3
3
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
10
MAIN FUNCTION
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
previous destinations
SCREEN MENU MAP
set speech synthesis
activate/deactivate road names
delete last destinations
MAP
CHOICE A
choice A1
choice A2
CHOICE B...
SELECT DESTINATION
enter an address
country:
town:
road:
N°/_:
curr. loc
Archive
POI
near
on the route
around current place
search by name
GPS coordinates
directory
JOURNEY LEGS AND ROUTE
add a stage
enter an address
directory
previous destinations
order/delete journey legs
divert route
chosen destination
GUIDANCE OPTIONS
defi ne calculation criteria
fastest
shortest
distance/time
with tolls
with ferry
traffi c info
STOP/RESUME GUIDANCE
MAP ORIENTATION
vehicle direction
north direction
3D view
MAP DETAILS
administration and safety
town halls, town centre
universities, colleges
hospitals
hotels, restaurants and shops
hotels
restaurants
vineyards
business centres
208
4
4
3
1
2
3
4
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
3
3
2
4
4
2
4
4
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
2
3
supermarkets, shopping
culture, tourism and shows
culture and museums
casinos and nightlife
cinemas and theatres
tourism
shows and exhibitions
sports and open air centres
sports centres
golf courses
skating rinks, bowling alleys
winter sports resorts
parks, gardens
theme parks
transport and automobile
airports, ports
stations, bus stations
vehicle rental
lay-bys, car parks
service stations, garages
read messages
new message display
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
SELECT TMC STATION
automatic TMC
manual TMC
list of TMC stations
MOVE THE MAP/FOLLOW VEHICLE
DISPLAY MAP
full screen
MAP
MAP
in window
MAP DATABASE DESCRIPTION
READ MESSAGES
FILTER TRAFFIC INFORMATION
geographic fi lter
store all messages
store messages
around the vehicle
on the route
road information
traffi c information
road closure
size limit
road condition
weather and visibility
urban/city information
parking
public transport
demonstrations
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
RADIO FAVOURITES
enter a frequency
activate/deactivate RDS mode
activate/deactivate regional mode
display/hide radio text
CD, USB, JUKEBOX FAVOURITES
activate/deactivate Introscan (SCN)
activate/deactivate Random mode (RDM)
activate/deactivate Repeat (RPT)
activate/deactivate display of CD info
CD
copy CD to Jukebox
copy complete CD
multiple selection
CONFIGURE MESSAGE ANNOUNCEMENT
209
1
4
2
3
3
3
4
4
2
4
3
4
4
4
4
4
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
3
5
5
5
3
3
2
3
5
5
3
2
4
3
5
4
3
4
3
4
4
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
3
5
4
5
5
2
3
4
4
current album
current track
eject CD
receive by infrared
exchange with SIM card
send all records to SIM
send one record to SIM
receive all SIM fi les
receive a SIM fi le
exchange with Bluetooth
TELEMATICS
call list
dial
directory
mailbox
services
customer contact centre
CITROËN assistance
CITROËN service
messages received
USB
copy USB to Jukebox
complete disc
multiple selection
current album
current track
eject USB
CALL
DIRECTORY
managing directory fi les
consult or modify a fi le
add a fi le
delete a fi le
delete all fi les
confi gure directory
select a directory
name directory
select starting directory
fi le transfer
exchange by infrared
send all records
send one record
TEXT MESSAGES (SMS)
read received text messages
send a text message
write a text message
delete list of text messages
TELEPHONE FUNCTIONS
network
network search mode
automatic mode
manual mode
networks available
length of calls
reset
manage PIN code
activate/deactivate
save PIN code
JUKEBOX
jukebox management
jukebox confi guration
hi-fi (320 kbps)
high (192 kbps)
normal (128 kbps)
playlist management
delete jukebox data
Jukebox status
210
6
3
3
3
4
1
2
3
3
3
3
2
4
5
5
4
5
5
1
3
2
3
1
2
3
3
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
3
2
2
2
3
4
3
4
4
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
Display short cuts version 8.2
modify PIN code
call options
confi gure calls
display my number
automatic reply after x ring(s)
ring options
for voice calls
for text messages (SMS)
text message ring
calls diversion to mailbox n°
delete calls log
CONFIGURATION
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
choose colour
adjust luminosity
set date and time
select units
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
SOUND
voice commands setting
speech synthesis setting
guidance instructions volume
other message volume
select female/male voice
activate/deactivate auxiliary source
VIDEO
VEHICLE DIAGNOSTICS
SELECT LANGUAGE
ACTIVATE VIDEO MODE
VIDEO PARAMETERS
display formats
adjust luminosity
set colours
set contrasts
ALERT LOG
STATUS OF FUNCTIONS *
RESET TYRE PRESS. DETEC. SYS. *
phone book synchronisation mode
no synchronisation
view telephone phone book
view SIM card phone book
view all phone books
BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
activation mode
deactivated
activated and visible
activated and not visible
list of matched peripheral equipment
change the name of the audio/telephone
authentication code
DEFINE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *
211
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
Press the MENU button for more
than 2 seconds to access the
following fl ow chart.
VOICE COMMANDS LIST
Press the Music button several
times in succession to access the
following settings.
AUTO VOLUME CORRECTION
Each audio source (Radio, CD, MP3,
Jukebox, CD changer) has its own
separate settings.
AUDIO/TELEPHONE DIAGNOSTICS
GPS COVERAGE
UNIT BACKUP POWER
UNIT DESCRIPTION
NAVIGATION DEMONSTRATION
SERVICES CONFIGURATION
LOUDNESS CORRECTION
TREBLE
BASS
MUSICAL AMBIENCE
FR - RR BALANCE
LH - RH BALANCE
212
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources,
which may result in audible differences when changing source
(radio, CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection
system which is not recognised by the audio equipment.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD player sound
is poor.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
The table below groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to inadequate quality, certain recorded
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
213
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs
of 1 to 2 seconds in
radio mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...)
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which
the stations are stored.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
214
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The TRAFFIC INFO
box is ticked. However,
certain traffi c jams
along the route are not
indicated in real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (displaying of the traffi c information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways, ...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems
longer than usual.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD is
being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD has been copied or stop the
copying before starting the guidance function.
Does the emergency call
function work without a
SIM card?
Certain national regulations impose the presence of a SIM card in order to
make an emergency call.
Insert a valid SIM card in the slot on the system.
My SIM card is not
recognised.
The system accepts 3.3 V SIM cards, the old 5 V and 1.8 V SIM cards are
not recognised.
Contact your telephone operator.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
4 satellites (long press on the MENU button, then
select AUDIO/TELEPHONE DIAGNOSTICS,
then GPS COVERAGE).
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel, ...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of the
GPS signal.
215
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The route is not
calculated successfully.
The exclusion criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a motorway with tolls).
Check the exclusion criteria.
There is a long wait after
inserting a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (folder, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the equipment
may not be visible.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function
is switched on.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
217
The MyWay is protected in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for confi guration of
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
le. If it i
the system.
Certain functions described in this handbook will become
available during the course of the year.
MyWay
CONTENTS
01 First steps p .
02 Steering mounted controls p .
03 General operation p .
04 Navigation - Guidance p .
05 Traffi c information p .
06 Radio p .
07 Music media players p .
08 Bluetooth telephone p .
09 Confi guration p .
10 Screen menu map p .
Frequently asked questions p .
For safety reasons, the driver should only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is switched off and to prevent
discharging of the battery, the MyWay switches off
following the activation of Energy Economy mode.
MULTIMEDIA AUDIO EQUIPMENT/BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
GPS EUROPE BY SD CARD
218
219
220
222
229
231
232
235
237
238
241
218
01
1
1
5
5
10
10
2
2
3
3
4
4
6
6
13
13
11
11
9
9
14
14
15
15
7
7
8
8
12
12
16
16
1.
Engine not running
- Short press: on/off.
- Long press: CD pause, mute for the radio.
Engine running
- Short press: CD pause, mute for the radio.
- Long press: reinitialisation of the system.
2.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including
navigation messages and alerts).
3.
Access to the "Radio" Menu. Display the list of stations.
4.
Access to the "Music" Menu. Display the tracks.
6.
Access to the "Phone" Menu. Display the call list.
7.
Access to the "MODE" Menu.
Selection of the successive display of:
Radio, Map, NAV (if navigation is in progress), Telephone
(if a conversation is in progress), Trip Computer.
Long press: display of a black screen (DARK).
8.
Access to the "Navigation" Menu. Display the last destinations.
9.
Access to the "Traffi c" Menu. Display the current traffi c alerts.
10.
ESC: abandon the operation in progress.
11.
CD eject.
12.
Selection of the previous/next radio station from the list.
Selection of the previous/next CD.
Selection of the previous/next MP3 directory.
Selection of the previous/next page of a list.
13.
Selection of the previous/next radio station.
Selection of the previous/next CD or MP3 track.
Selection of the previous/next line of a list.
14.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Selection of the stored radio station.
Selection of the CD in the CD changer.
Long press: store the current radio station.
15.
Reader for navigation SD card only.
16.
Dial for selection of the screen display and according to the
context of the menu.
Short press: contextual menu or confi rmation.
Long press: specifi c contextual menu of the list displayed.
FIRST STEPS
MyWay CONTROL PANEL
3 - 4.
Long press: access to the audio settings: front/rear and left/
right balance, bass/treble, equalizer, loudness, automatic
volume adjustment, initialise the settings.
5.
Access to the "SETUP" Menu.
Long press: access to the GPS coverage and the
demonstration mode.
219
02
4
1
2
3
5
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
3
4
1
STEERING MOUNTED CONTROLS
1.
Volume increase.
2.
Volume decrease.
3.
Successive presses mute/restore the sound.
4.
Rotation - associated with a pop-up.
Radio - access the 6 stored stations: next or previous.
Music players: previous/next track.
5.
Radio: next station.
Music players: next track.
1.
Press.
Repeat the current spoken navigation instruction.
2.
Short press to make a telephone call.
Pick up/Hang up.
Access the telephone menu.
Display the call list.
Long press to reject an incoming call.
3.
Personalisation.
Short press to confi rm the choice made using the dial.
4.
Rotation.
Scroll through the call list in the phone book.
Personalisation selection.
1.
Short press: provides access to the menu according to
the display on the screen.
2.
Successive presses: provides access according to the
current display on the screen.
MAP/NAV (if navigation is in progress), TEL (if a conversation
is in progress), RADIO or MEDIA in progress, Trip computer.
Long press: switch to black screen - Dark (night driving).
Touching a control restores the display.
3.
ESC: abandon the current operation.
4.
Rotation: selects the access to the short-cut menus
according to the current display.
5.
Confi rms the choice displayed on the screen.
220
03
GENERAL OPERATION
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to the
"Screen menu map" section.
Press the MODE button several times in succession for access to the following menus:
For cleaning the screen, the use of a soft, non-abrasive cloth
(spectacles cloth) is recommended, with no additional product.
RADIO /MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
TELEPHONE
(If a conversation is in progress)
FULL SCREEN MAP
NAVIGATION
(If guidance is in progress)
SETUP:
system language * , date and time * , display,
vehicle settings * , unit and system settings, "Demo
mode".
TRAFFIC:
TMC information and messages.
* Available according to model.
TRIP COMPUTER
221
03
1
2
3
3
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
GENERAL OPERATION
A press on the OK dial gives access to
short-cut menus according to the display
on the screen.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS:
NAVIGATION (IF GUIDANCE IS IN PROGRESS):
ABORT GUIDANCE
REPEAT ADVICE
BLOCK ROAD
ROUTE INFO
SHOW DESTINATION
TRIP INFO
Route type
Avoid
Satellites
ZOOM/SCROLL
VOICE ADVICE
ROUTE OPTIONS
RADIO:
IN FM MODE
TRAFFIC INFO (TA)
RDS
RADIOTEXT
REGIONAL PROG.
AM
IN AM MODE
TA
REFRESH AM LIST
FM
FULL SCREEN MAP:
DISPLAY ACCORDING TO THE CONTEXT
TRAFFIC INFO (TA)
PLAY OPTIONS
NORMAL ORDER
RANDOM TRACK
REPEAT FOLDER
SCAN
SELECT MUSIC
TELEPHONE:
END CALL
HOLD CALL
DIAL
DTMF-TONES
PRIVATE MODE
MICRO OFF
ABORT GUIDANCE /RESUME GUIDANCE
SET DESTINATION
POIS NEARBY
POSITION INFO
MAP SETTINGS
ZOOM/SCROLL
222
1
2
3
5
6
4
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SELECTING A DESTINATION
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Destination input" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Select the letters of the town one by
one confi rming each time by pressing
the dial.
Once the country has been selected,
turn the dial and select the town
function. Press the dial to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
DESTINATION INPUT
Insert the SD card in the front panel reader and leave it there to use the Navigation functions.
The navigation SD card data must not be modifi ed.
Map data updates are available from CITROËN dealers.
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
A pre-set list (by entering the fi rst few letters) of the towns in the
country selected can be accessed via the LIST button on
tton on the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Address input" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
ADDRESS INPUT
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
The list of the last 20 destinations appears under the Navigation
Menu function.
223
7
8
9
10
04
To clear a destination; from steps 1 to 3, select "Choose from last destinations". A long press
on one of the destinations displays a list of actions from which you can select:
Delete entry
Delete list
Repeat steps 5 to 7 for the "Street"
and "House number" functions.
Turn the dial and select OK.
Press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Save to address book" function to record th
ord the address
entered in a directory fi le. Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
entered in a directory fi le. Press the dial to confi rm the selection.
MyWay allows up to 4 000 contact fi les to be recorded.
MyWay allows up to 4 000 contact fi les to be recorded.
To speed up the process, the post code can be entered
tered directly
after selecting the "Postal code" function.
Use the virtual keypad to enter the letters and digits.
Then select "Start route guidance"
and the press the dial to confi rm.
During guidance, pressing the end
of the lighting stalk repeats the last
guidance instruction.
You can zoom in/zoom out on the map using the dial.
It is possible to scroll the map or select its orientation via
ion via the short-
cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP. Press the dial then select
cut menu of the FULL SCREEN MAP. Press the dial then select
"Map settings".
Select the route type:
"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to
"Fast route", "Short route" or "Optimized route" and press the dial to
confi rm.
It is also possible to select a destination via "Choose fro
se from address
book" or "Choose from last destinations".
CHOOSE FROM LAST DESTINATIONS
CHOOSE FROM LAST DESTINATIONS
CHOOSE FROM ADDRESS BOOK
START ROUTE GUIDANCE
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
224
4
3
2
1
7
6
5
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
ROUTE OPTIONS
Select the "Route dynamics" function.
This function gives access to the
"Traffi c independent" or "Semi-
dynamic" options.
Select the "Avoidance criteria"
function. This function provides
access to the AVOID options
(motorways, toll roads, ferries).
Turn the dial and select the
"Recalculate" function to take into
account the route options selected.
Press the dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Route type" function and
press the dial to confi rm. This function
allows you to change the route type.
Select the "Route options" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
RECALCULATE
AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
ROUTE DYNAMICS
ROUTE TYPE
ROUTE OPTIONS
NAVIGATION MENU
The route selected by the MyWay audio/telephone depends directly on the route options.
Changing these options may change the route completely.
225
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
04
ADDING A STOPOVER
Enter a new address, for example.
Once the new address has been
entered, select OK and press the dial
to confi rm.
Select "Recalculate" and press the
dial to confi rm.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the "Navigation" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Add stopover" function
(5 stopovers maximum) and press the
dial to confi rm.
Select the "Stopovers" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
OK
ADDRESS INPUT
ADD STOPOVER
STOPOVERS
"NAVIGATION" MENU
RECALCULATE
The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance
The stopover must be completed or deleted in order for the guidance
to continue to the next destination. Otherwise, the MyWa
MyWay will always
return you to the previous stopover.
Stopovers can be added to the route once the destination has been selected.
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
226
8
6
7
4
3
5
2
1
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
SEARCHING FOR POINTS OF INTEREST
(POI)
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "POI nearby" function to
search for POIs around the vehicle.
Select the "POI search" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
NAVIGATION MENU
POI SEARCH
POI NEARBY
Select the "POI in city" function to
search for POIs in the city required.
Select the country then enter the name
of the city using the virtual keypad.
Select the "POI near route" function
to search for POIs near the route.
Select the "POI in country" function
to search for POIs in the country
required.
Select the "POI near destination"
function to search for POIs near the
point of arrival of the route.
POI NEAR DESTINATION
POI NEAR ROUTE
POI IN COUNTRY
POI IN CITY
A list of cities present in the country selected can be acc
be accessed via
the LIST button on the virtual keypad.
The points of interest (POI) indicate all of the service locations in the vicinity (hotels, various
businesses, airports...).
227
04
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
LIST OF PRINCIPAL POINTS OF INTEREST (POI)
*
According to availability in the country.
This icon appears when several POIs
are grouped together in the same area.
Zooming in on this icon shows details
of the POIs.
228
5
6
3
2
1
4
04
NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Select "Set parameters for risk areas"
to gain access to the "Display on
map", "Visual alert" and "Sound alert"
functions.
Select the "POI categories on Map"
function to select the POIs to be
displayed on the map by default.
Press the NAV button.
Press the NAV button again or select
the Navigation Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Settings" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
POI CATEGORIES ON MAP
SETTINGS
SET PARAMETERS FOR RISK AREAS
NAVIGATION MENU
NAVIGATION - GUIDANCE
Select the "Navi volume" function and
turn the dial to set the volume of each
voice synthesiser (traffi c information,
alert messages…).
NAVI VOLUME
The adjustment of the volume for the Risk Areas POIs is used only
during the transmission of an alert.
UPDATING THE RISK AREAS POIs
Contact a CITROËN dealer for the procedure to follow to obtain
the RISK AREA POIs.
This requires an SDHC (High Capacity) compatible reader.
229
2
1
3
4
5
05
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
CONFIGURE THE FILTERING AND
DISPLAY OF TMC MESSAGES
Then select the radius of the fi lter in
miles (km) required in accordance
with the route, press the dial to
confi rm.
When all of the messages on the
route are selected, the addition of a
geographical fi lter is recommended
(within a radius of 3 miles (5 km) for
example) to reduce the number of
messages displayed on the map.
The geographical fi lter follows the
movement of the vehicle.
The fi lters are independent and their results are cumulative.
The fi lters are independent and their results are cumulative.
We recommend a fi lter on the route and a fi lter around the vehicle of:
We recommend a fi lter on the route and a fi lter around the vehicle of:
- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffi c,
- 2 miles (3 km) or 3 miles (5 km) for a region with heavy traffi c,
- 6 miles (10 km) for a region with normal traffi c,
- 30 miles (50 km) for long journeys (motorway).
Press the TRAFFIC button again or
select the Traffi c Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press the TRAFFIC button.
TMC (Traffi c Message Channel) messages contain information on traffi c and weather conditions,
received in real time and transmitted to the driver in the form of audible announcements and
symbols on the navigation map.
The navigation system can then suggest an alternative route to avoid a traffi c problem.
Select the "Geo. Filter" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
The list of TMC messages appears under the Traffi c Menu sorted in
order of proximity.
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
TRAFFIC MENU
Select the fi lter of your choice:
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE
ALL MESSAGES
The messages appear on the map
and on the list.
To exit, press ESC.
GEO. FILTER
230
05
2
1
3
2
1
836.1
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
PRINCIPAL TMC SYMBOLS
Red and yellow triangle: traffi c information, par example:
Black and blue triangle: general information, for example:
With the current audio source
displayed on the screen, press the
dial.
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
The shortcut menu for the source appears and gives access to:
Select Traffi c Announcements (TA)
and press the dial to confi rm and go
to the associated settings.
TA
The TA (Traffi c Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert
messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio
station transmitting this type of message. When a traffi c report is
transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, Jukebox, ...) is
interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback
of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the
message.
RECEIVING TA MESSAGES
231
3
2
1
1
06
SELECTING A STATION
When the current radio station is
displayed on the screen, press the dial.
The radio source short-cuts menu appears and provides
ovides access to
the following short-cuts:
Select the function required and press
the dial to confi rm to gain access to
the corresponding settings.
TA
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
RDS, if displayed, allows you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of
throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of
the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during
the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during
a journey.
The external environment (hill, building, tunnel, underground car park...) may interfere with
the reception, including in RDS following mode. This phenomenon is a normal result of the
way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not in any way indicate a failure of the
audio equipment.
RDS - REGIONAL MODE
Press the RADIO button to display
the list of stations received locally
sorted in alphabetical order.
Select the station required by turning
the dial and press to confi rm.
While listening to the radio, press one of the
buttons to select the previous or next station on
the list.
Press one of the buttons on the numeric keypad for mo
or more than
2 seconds to store the current station.
Press the button on the numeric keypad to recall the sto
the stored radio
station.
RDS
RADIOTEXT
REGIONAL PROG.
AM
RADIO
A long press of one of the buttons starts the
automatic search for a station with a lower or
higher frequency.
232
07
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
CD, MP3/WMA CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet
standard.
If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be pla
be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The MyWay will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
The MyWay will only play audio fi les with the extension ".mp3" with
a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma"
a speed of between 8 Kbps and 320 Kbps and the extension ".wma"
with a speed of between 5 Kbps and 384 Kbps.
It also supports the VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
No other type of fi le (.mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1, 2 & 2.5 Audio Layer 3
and the WMA format, an abbreviation of Windows Medi
Media Audio and
the property of Microsoft, are audio compression standa
standards which
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
permit the recording of several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters, without using
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
special characters (e.g.: " " ? ; ù) to avoid any play or display
problems.
233
07
6
4
5
3
2
1
SELECTING/PLAYING MUSIC
CD, MP3/WMA CD
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
The playing and displaying of an MP3/WMA compilation may
depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.
depend on the recording programme and/or the settings used.
We recommend the ISO 9660 fi le standard.
Press the MUSIC button.
Select the "Select music" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press the up or down button to select
the next/previous folder.
Select the music source required:
CD, MP3/WMA CD. Press the dial to
confi rm. Play begins.
SELECT MUSIC
Press the MUSIC button again or
select the "Music" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Press one of the buttons to select a
music track.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or rewind play.
"MUSIC" MENU
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Music" Menu.
The list of tracks or MP3/WMA fi les appears under "Music" Menu.
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
234
3
1
2
07
1
4
2
3
5
4
Connect the portable equipment
(MP3/WMA player…) to the audio
sockets (white and red, RCA type)
in the glove box using a JACK/RCA
audio cable.
Press the MUSIC button then press
it again or select the Music Menu
function and press the dial to confi rm.
Select the AUX music source and
press the dial to confi rm. Play begins
automatically.
Select the "External device" function
and press the dial to activate it.
EXTERNAL DEVICE
The display and management of the controls is via the portable
The display and management of the controls is via the portable
equipment.
USING THE EXTERNAL INPUT (AUX)
AUDIO/RCA CABLE NOT SUPPLIED
MUSIC MEDIA PLAYERS
MUSIC MENU
CD CHANGER
SELECT MUSIC
MUSIC MENU
Insert one or more CDs in the
changer. Press the MUSIC button.
Press one of the buttons on the
numeric keypad to select the
corresponding CD.
Select the "CD Changer" music
source and press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Select music" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
CD CHANGER
PLAYING A CD (NOT MP3/WMA COMPATIBLE)
Press the MUSIC button again or
select the Music Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
235
1
2
3
2
1
4
08
* The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth
telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the
services available to you. A list of mobile telephones with the best level of compatibility is available
from the dealer network.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
CONNECTING A TELEPHONE
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth
mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the MyWa
MyWay must be
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
carried out with the vehicle stationary. The ignition must be on.
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
The last telephone connected is reconnected
automatically.
Enter the authentication code on the
telephone. The code to be entered is
displayed on the screen.
To change the telephone connected,
press the PHONE button, then select
Phone Menu and press the dial to
confi rm.
Once the telephone has been connected, MyWay can s
can synchronise
the address book and the call list. This synchronisation
ation may take a
few minutes * .
Select "Connect phone". Select the
telephone and press to confi rm.
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears
The list of telephones connected previously (4 maximum) appears
on the multifunction screen. Select the telephone requir
required for a new
connection.
Press the PHONE button.
For a fi rst connection, select
"Search phone" and press the dial to
confi rm. Then select the name of the
telephone.
SEARCH PHONE
CONNECT PHONE
236
08
2
1
1
3
2
Press the end of the steering mounted control to accept the call or
end the call in progress.
Select the "Yes" tab to accept or "No"
to refuse and confi rm by pressing the
dial.
RECEIVING A CALL
MAKING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the multifunction screen.
YES
To hang up, press the PHONE button
or press the dial and select "End call"
then confi rm by pressing the dial.
END CALL
Press the PHONE button.
Select "Dial number", then dial the
telephone number using the virtual
keypad.
Select the "Phone" Menu function and
press the dial to confi rm.
The list of the last 20 calls made and received in the veh
he vehicle appears
under "Phone" Menu. You can select a number and pres
d press the dial to
make the call.
NO
It is also possible to select a number from the address b
ress book. You
can select "Dial from address book". The MyWay can record up to
can select "Dial from address book". The MyWay can record up to
4 000 entries.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than
Press the end of the steering mounted control for more than
two seconds to gain access to the address book.
"PHONE" MENU
DIAL NUMBER
To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold on
To delete a number, press the PHONE button then press and hold on
a call number to display a list of actions including:
Delete entry
Delete list
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
237
4
3
2
1
6
5
09
CONFIGURATION
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
The SETUP function gives access to the following options: System language, Date & Time, Display
(Brightness, Colour, Map colour), Vehicle, Units, System.
Set the parameters one by one using
the direction arrows and confi rm by
means of the dial.
Select the "Date format" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
Select the "Set date & time" function
and press the dial to confi rm.
Confi rm the format required using the dial.
Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 seconds gives
Pressing the SET UP button for more than 2 seconds gives
access to:
These settings must be re-entered if the battery has been
These settings must be re-entered if the battery has been
disconnected.
Press the SET UP button.
Confi rm the format required using
the dial.
Select the "Time format" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
SET DATE & TIME
Select the "Date & Time" function and
press the dial to confi rm.
DESCRIPTION OF THE UNIT
GPS COVERAGE
DEMO MODE
DATE & TIME
238
10
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
4
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
3
2
3
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
1
2
3
3
2
3
3
"RADIO" MENU
MAIN FUNCTION
CHOICE A
choice A1
choice A2
CHOICE B...
SCREEN MENU MAP
"MUSIC" MENU
"TRAFFIC" MENU
MESSAGES ON ROUTE
ONLY WARNINGS ON ROUTE
ALL WARNING MESSAGES
ALL MESSAGES
GEO. FILTER
Within 2 miles (3 km)
Within 3 miles (5 km)
Within 6 miles (10 km)
Within 30 miles (50 km)
Within 60 miles (100 km)
SELECT MUSIC
SOUND SETTINGS
Balance/Fader
Bass/Treble
Equalizer
Linear
Classic
Jazz
Rock/Pop
Techno
Vocal
Loudness
Speed dependent volume
Reset sound settings
WAVEBAND
FM
AM
MANUAL TUNE
SOUND SETTINGS
Balance/Fader
Bass/Treble
Equalizer
Linear
Classic
Jazz
Rock/Pop
Techno
Vocal
Loudness
Speed dependent volume
Reset sound settings
239
1
2
4
2
3
4
2
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
2
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
ROUTE OPTIONS
Route type
Fast route
Short route
Optimized route
Route dynamics
Traffi c independent
Semi-dynamic
Avoidance criteria
Avoid motorways
Avoid toll roads
Avoid ferries
Recalculate
STOPOVERS
Add stopover
Address input
Navigate HOME
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
Rearrange route
Replace stopover
Delete stopover
Recalculate
Fast route
Short route
Optimized route
"NAVIGATION" MENU
ABORT GUIDANCE/RESUME GUIDANCE
POI SEARCH
POI nearby
POI near destination
POI in city
POI in country
POI near route
SETTINGS
Navi volume
POI categories on Map
Set parameters for risk areas
Display on
MAP
Visual alert
Sound alert
DESTINATION INPUT
Address input
Country
City
Street
House number
Start route guidance
Postal code
Save to address book
Intersection
City district
Geo position
MAP
Navigate HOME
Choose from address book
Choose from last destinations
TMC station information
240
1
2
3
4
1
3
4
3
4
2
2
2
3
4
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
2
3
3
3
2
3
4
4
4
4
2
4
3
4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
4
4
2
3
4
4
3
4
4
4
2
3
3
3
"PHONE" MENU
"SETUP" MENU
DIAL NUMBER
SETTINGS
Select ring tone
Phone/Ring tone volume
Enter mailbox number
SYSTEM LANGUAGE *
Deutsch
English
Español
Français
Italiano
Nederlands
Polski
Portuguese
DATE & TIME *
Set date & time
Date format
Time format
Dark blue
MAP
colour
Day mode for
MAP
Night mode for
MAP
Auto. Day/Night for
MAP
VEHICLE *
Vehicle information
Alert log
Status of functions
DISPLAY
Brightness
Colour
Pop titanium
Toffee
Blue steel
Technogrey
UNITS
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Metric/Imperial
Kilometres (Consumption: l/100)
Kilometres (Consumption: km/l)
Miles (Consumption: MPG)
SYSTEM
Factory reset
Software version
Automatic scrolling
* Available according to model.
DIAL FROM ADDRESS BOOK
CALL LISTS
CONNECT PHONE
Search phone
Phones connected
Disconnect phone
Rename phone
Delete pairing
Delete all pairings
Show details
241
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the Linear musical ambience
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which
may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the Audio section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Because of their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
The CD player sound
is poor.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
242
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block
reception, including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of
1 to 2 seconds in radio
mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a few
minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...)
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the
stations are stored.
243
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The TA box is ticked.
However, certain traffi c
jams along the route
are not indicated in
real time.
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive the
traffi c information.
Wait until the traffi c information is being received
correctly (displaying of the traffi c information
symbols on the map).
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the
traffi c information.
The time taken to
calculate a route
sometimes seems
longer than usual.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the traffi c information available.
The performance of the system may slow down temporarily if a CD is
being copied onto the Jukebox at the same time as a route is being
calculated.
Wait until the CD has been copied or stop the
copying before starting the guidance function.
The altitude is not
displayed.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to
receive more than 3 satellites correctly.
Wait until the system has started up completely.
Check that there is a GPS coverage of at least
3 satellites (long press on the SETUP button,
then select GPS coverage).
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather,
the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is
dependent on the conditions of reception of
the GPS signal.
The route is not
calculated successfully.
The exclusion criteria may confl ict with the current location (exclusion of
toll roads on a motorway with tolls).
Check the exclusion criteria.
I receive a speed
camera alert for a
camera which is not on
my route.
The audible speed
camera alert is not
working.
The system announces all speed cameras located in a conical zone
forward of the vehicle. It may detect speed cameras on nearby or parallel
roads.
Audible alerts are not active.
The alert volume level is set to minimum.
Zoom the map to view the exact position of the
speed camera.
Activate audible alerts in Navigation Menu,
Settings, Set parameters for risk areas.
Increase the speed camera alert volume.
244
There is a long waiting
time after inserting a CD.
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain amount of
data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take a few seconds.
This phenomenon is normal.
I cannot connect my
Bluetooth telephone.
A telephone connected
by Bluetooth is
inaudible.
The telephone's Bluetooth function may be deactivated or the equipment
may not be visible.
The volume level depends on both the system and the telephone.
- Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function
is activated.
- Check that your telephone is visible.
Increase the MyWay volume setting, possibly to
maximum, and increase the telephone volume
level if necessary.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
245
Audio system
CONTENTS
• 01 First steps p .
• 02 Steering mounted controls p .
• 03 Main menu p .
• 04 Audio p .
• 05 USB Player p .
• 06 Bluetooth functions p .
• 07 Confi guration p .
• 08 Screen menu map p .
• Frequently asked questions p .
Your Audio system is coded in such a way that it will only
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
vehicle, contact a CITROËN dealer for confi guration of
operate in your vehicle. If it is to be installed in another
le. If it i
the system.
For safety reasons, the driver should only carry out
operations which require prolonged attention while the
vehicle is stationary.
When the engine is off, and in order to prevent
discharging of the battery, the audio system may switch
off after a few minutes.
246
247
248
249
252
255
257
258
260
246
1
1
2
2
10
10
11
11
13
13
14
14
15
15
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
12
12
01
FIRST STEPS
1.
On/Off and volume adjustment.
2.
CD eject.
3.
Selection of the display on the screen from the following modes
:
Audio (AUDIO), Trip Computer (TRIP) and Telephone (TEL)
functions.
4.
Selection of source:
radio, audio CD/MP3 CD, CD changer, USB, auxiliaryJack
connection, Streaming.
5.
Selection of FM1, FM2, FMast and AM wavebands.
6.
Setting audio options: front/rear balance, left/right balance,
loudness, sound ambience.
7.
Display the list of local stations, of the tracks on the CD or of
the MP3 folders.
8.
Abandon current operation.
9.
TA (Traffi c Announcement) function on/off.
Long press: access to the PTY
(Types of radio programme) mode.
10.
Confi rmation.
11.
Automatic search for a lower/higher frequency.
Selection of previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track.
12.
Selection of a lower/higher radio frequency.
Selection of the previous/next MP3 folder.
Selection of the previous/next USB equipment folder/genre/
artist/playlist.
13.
Display the general menu.
14.
Buttons 1 to 6:
Selection of a stored radio station.
Long press: store a station.
15.
The DARK button changes the display on the screen to
improve driving comfort at night.
1st press: lighting the upper band only.
2nd press: display of a black screen.
3rd press: return to the standard display.
247
02
4
1
2
3
5
1
2
3
4
5
2
1
1.
Volume increase.
2.
Volume decrease.
3.
Mute.
4.
RADIO:
selection of the previous or next stored station.
CD/MP3/USB:
selection of the previous or next directory.
CD CHANGER: selection of the previous or next CD.
5.
RADIO: automatic search for a higher frequency.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER/USB:
selection of the next track.
CD/MP3/CD CHANGER:
continuous press: fast forwards play.
1.
Displays the main screen.
2.
Selection of the type of information displayed on the
right-hand side of the screen for the monochrome screen A.
3.
Abandon the operation in progress
and return to the previous display.
4.
Navigation through the menus.
5.
Confi rmation of the function selected.
If your vehicle is fi tted with the Bluetooth system: pick up an
incoming call or hang up a call which is in progress.
If your vehicle is fi tted with the Bluetooth system:
1.
Press: activation of telephone voice recognition
(if the telephone offers this function).
2.
Press: displays the phone book, of the call list.
248
03
MAIN MENU
AUDIO FUNCTIONS : radio,
CD, USB, options.
TRIP COMPUTER : entering of
distances, alerts, status of functions.
TELEPHONE : Bluetooth
hands-free, pairing,
management of a call.
PERSONALISATION-
CONFIGURATION : vehicle parameters,
display, languages.
> MONOCHROME SCREEN C
> MONOCHROME SCREEN A
For a detailed global view of
the menus available, refer to
the "Screen menu map" section
of this chapter.
249
2
3
3
4
4
1
2
2
4
4
3
3
1
1
04
AUDIO
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select
the radio.
Press the BAND AST button to select
a waveband: FM1, FM2, FMast, AM.
Briefl y press one of the buttons to
carry out an automatic search of
the radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out a
manual search of the radio stations.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to
display the list of stations received
locally (30 stations maximum).
To update this list, press for more than
two seconds.
Select ACTIVATE FREQUENCY
FOLLOWING (RDS) then press OK.
RDS appears on the display.
Select the FM WAVEBAND
PREFERENCES function then
press OK.
Select AUDIO FUNCTIONS
then press OK.
Press the MENU button.
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks) may block reception, including
in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not
indicate any failure of the audio equipment.
RDS
The RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same
station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in
certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured
throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the
territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
RADIO
SELECTING A STATION
250
04
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
3
3
2
2
AUDIO
Insert circular compact discs only.
Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a
personal recorder, may cause faults which are no refl ection on the
quality of the original player.
Without pressing the EJECT button, insert a CD in the player, play
begins automatically.
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward.
Insert an MP3 compilation in the player.
The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may
take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds,
before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 fi les spread
over 8 directory levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of
two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played.
While the CD is being played, the directory fl ow chart is not followed.
All of the fi les are displayed on a single level.
To play a disc which has already been
inserted, press the SOURCE button
several times in succession and
select CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
CD
PLAYING A CD
MP3 CD
PLAYING AN MP3 COMPILATION
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of directories of
the MP3 compilation.
251
04
1
1
2
2
3
3
The MP3 format, an abbreviation of MPEG 1.2 & 2.5 Au
2.5 Audio Layer 3,
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
is an audio compression standard which permits the recording of
several tens of music fi les on a single disc.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
it is preferable to select standards ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet.
If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be p
t be played
correctly.
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum)
for optimum sound quality.
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is
recommended.
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3"
The audio equipment will only play fi les with the extension ".mp3"
with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of fi le
(.wma, .mp4, .m3u...) can be played.
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
It is advisable to restrict fi le names to 20 characters without using
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying
problems.
MP3 CD
INFORMATION AND ADVICE
AUDIO
Insert the CDs in a multi-slot changer
one by one.
On a single slot changer, press
LOAD, select the number of the CD,
then insert the CD, or press and hold
LOAD and insert the CDs one by one.
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select CD
CHANGER.
Press one of the buttons on
the numeric keypad to select
the corresponding CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a
track on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forwards or rewind play.
PLAYING A CD
* according to availability on the vehicle.
AUDIO/MP3 CD CHANGER *
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
Empty CDs are not recognised and may damage the system.
252
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
05
USB BOX
The system puts together playlists (temporary memory) created over
a period which depends on the capacity of the USB equipment.
The other sources are available during this time.
The playlists are updated each time the ignition is switched off or
each time a USB memory stick is connected.
When connecting for the fi rst time, the classifi cation suggested is by
folder. When you reconnect, the classifi cation selected previously is
retained.
Connect the memory stick to the port, directly or
using a lead. If the audio equipment is switched
on, the USB source is detected as soon as it
is connected. Play begins automatically after
a delay which depends on the capacity of
the USB stick.
The fi le formats recognised are .mp3 (mpeg1
layer 3 only), .wma (standard 9 only, 128 kbits/sec
compression), .wav and .ogg.
The playlists types accepted are m3u, .pls, .wpl.
This unit consists of a USB port and a Jack
socket * . The audio fi les are transmitted from
portable equipment such as a digital player or a
USB memory stick to your Audio system to be
listened to via the vehicle's speakers.
USB key (1.1, 1.2 and 2.0) or iPod
®
of
®
generation 5 or later:
- USB memory sticks should be formatted FAT
or FAT 32 (NTFS not supported),
- the iPod
®
lead is essential,
®
- navigation through the fi le database is by
means of the steering wheel controls,
- the iPod
®
software should be regularly updated
®
for the best connection.
Other iPod
®
players of earlier generations and
®
players using the MTP protocol * :
- play via Jack-Jack lead only (not supplied),
- navigation through the fi le database is from the
portable equipment.
The list of compatible equipment and the compression rates supported are available from
CITROËN dealers.
USING THE USB BOX
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY STICK
* According to vehicle.
253
3
3
4
4
1
1
5
5
2
2
USB BOX
USING THE USB PORT
Press LIST briefl y to display the
previously selected classifi cation.
Navigate through the list using the
left/right and up/down buttons.
Confi rm the selection by pressing OK.
The lists available are Artist, Genre and Playlist (as defi ned on
the iPod
®
).
®
Selection and Navigation are described in steps 1 to 5 above.
Do not connect a hard disk or USB devices other than audio
equipment to the USB port. This could damage your installation.
CONNECTING AN iPod
®
AN iPod
AN iPod
VIA THE USB PORT
®
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous/next track on
the classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold one of the buttons for
fast forward or backward play.
Press one of these buttons to gain
access to the previous/next Genre,
Folder, Artist or Playlist on the
classifi cation list currently being
played.
Press and hold LIST to display the
different classifi cations.
Select by Folder/Artist/Genre/Playlist,
press OK to select the classifi cation
required, then press OK
again to confi rm.
- by Folder: all folders containing audio
fi les recognised on the peripheral
device, classifi ed in alphabetical order
without following the fl ow chart.
- by Artist: all of the artist names
defi ned in the ID3 Tags, classifi ed in
alphabetical order.
- by Genre: all of the genres defi ned in
the ID3 Tags.
- by Playlist: in accordance with the
playlists recorded on the USB device.
OK
254
05
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
The controls are displayed and managed via
the portable equipment.
First adjust the volume of your portable equipment.
Then adjust the volume of your audio
equipment.
The auxiliary socket, JACK or RCA, permits the connection of
portable equipment (MP3 player...).
Connect the portable equipment
(MP3 player…) to the JACK socket or
to the audio sockets (white and red,
RCA type) using a suitable cable (not
supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several
times in succession and select AUX.
USING THE AUXILIARY SOCKET (AUX)
JACK SOCKET OR RCA SOCKET (according to vehicle)
ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF
THE AUXILIARY SOURCE
Do not connect a single piece of equipment via the USB port and
the JACK socket at the same time.
USB BOX
255
1
1
6
6
2
2
7
7
4
4
9
9
5
5
10
10
3
3
8
8

 
06
BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
For safety reasons and because they require prolonged attention
on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth
mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio
equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the
ignition on.
Press the MENU button.
A window is displayed with "Searching...".
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function.
In the menu, select:
- Bluetooth telephone function - Audio
- Bluetooth confi guration
- Perform a Bluetooth search
The services offered depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth
equipment used.
Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to fi nd out which services are available to you.
A list of mobile telephones which offer the best range of services is available from the network.
Consult a CITROËN dealer.
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
SCREEN C
The TELEPHONE menu permits access to the following functions in
particular: Directory * , Call list, Pairing management.
The fi rst 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
A virtual keypad is displayed on the screen:
enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confi rm by pressing OK.
If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one
telephone can be connected at a time.
A message is displayed on the screen of the
telephone chosen: to accept the pairing, enter
the same code on the telephone, then confi rm by
pressing OK.
"Pairing of Name_telephone successful" appears on the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has
been confi gured.
The directory and the call list can be accessed after the synchronisation period.
PAIRING A TELEPHONE
* If your telephone is fully compatible.
The pairing can also be initiated from the telephone.
256
06
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
2
2
1
1
RECEIVING A CALL
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display
on the multifunction screen.
Initiate the pairing between the telephone and
the vehicle. This pairing can be initiated from
the vehicle's telephone function menu or via the
telephone's keypad. See steps 1 to 10 on the
previous pages. During the pairing phase, the vehicle
must be stationary with the key in the ignition.
Select the telephone to be connected from the telephone function
menu.
The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone
automatically.
Select the YES tab on the display
using the buttons and confi rm by
pressing OK.
Press the steering mounted control OK to accept
the call.
From the Bluetooth telephone function Audio menu, select Manage
the telephone call then Call, Call list or Directory.
Press the end of the steering mounted control for
more than two seconds to gain access to your
directory.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad,
with the vehicle stationary.
MAKING A CALL
BLUETOOTH AUDIO STREAMING
(AVAILABLE DURING THE YEAR)
Wireless transmission of the telephone's music fi les via the audio
equipment. The telephone must be able to manage the appropriate
bluetooth profi les (Profi les A2DP/AVRCP).
* In certain cases, playing of the Audio fi les must be initiated from
the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
Activate the streaming source by
pressing the SOURCE button * . The
tracks to be played can be controlled
as usual via the buttons on the Radio
control panel and the steering wheel
controls ** . The contextual information
can be displayed on the screen.
BLUETOOTH FUNCTIONS
257
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
07
CONFIGURATION
Press the MENU button.
Using the arrows, select
PERSONALISATION
CONFIGURATION.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Using the arrows, select DISPLAY
CONFIGURATION.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Press to confi rm the selection.
Using the arrows, select ADJUST
DATE AND TIME.
Adjust the settings one by one
confi rming by pressing the OK button.
Next select the OK tab on the screen
then confi rm.
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME
SCREEN C
258
1
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
3
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
1
2
3
2
3
08
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
RADIO-CD
DISPLAY ADJUST
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTES
12 H/24 H MODE
SCREEN MENU MAP
MAIN FUNCTION
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
CHOICE A
Choice A1
Choice A2
CHOICE B...
LANGUAGE
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
NEDERLANDS
PORTUGUES
PORTUGUES-BRASIL
DEUTSCH
ENGLISH
ESPANOL
Press the OK dial for access to short-cut
menus according to the display on the
screen:
monochrome A
monochrome C
RADIO
activate/deactivate RDS
activate/deactivate REG mode
activate/deactivate radiotext
RANDOM PLAY
RDS SEARCH
REG MODE
CD REPEAT
VEHICLE CONFIG *
REV WIPE ACT
GUIDE LAMPS
OPTIONS
DIAGNOSTICS
consult
abandon
UNITS
TEMPERATURE: °CELSIUS/°FAHRENHEIT
FUEL CONSUMPTION: KM/L - L/100 - MPG
CD/MP3 CD/CD CHANGER
activate/deactivate Intro
activate/deactivate track repeat (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder for
MP3 CD or MP3 Changer)
activate/deactivate random play (the entire current CD
for CD or CD Changer, the entire current folder
for MP3 CD, all of the folders of the current CD for
MP3 Changer)
USB
activate/deactivate track repeat (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
activate/deactivate random play (of the current folder/
artist/genre/playlist)
259
1
2
4
3
2
4
4
3
3
4
4
2
3
4
4
3
3
2
3
2
1
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
08
1
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
2
3
4
2
3
3
AUDIO FUNCTIONS
FM BAND PREFERENCES
alternative frequencies (RDS)
activate/deactivate
regional mode (REG)
activate/deactivate
radio-text information (RDTXT)
activate/deactivate
PLAY MODES
album repeat (RPT)
activate/deactivate
track random play (RDM)
activate/deactivate
ENTER DISTANCE TO DESTINATION
Distance: x miles
PERSONALISATION-CONFIGURATION
DEFINE THE VEHICLE PARAMETERS *
DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
video brightness adjustment
normal video
inverse video
brightness (- +) adjustment
date and time adjustment
day/month/year adjustment
hour/minute adjustment
choice of 12 h/24 h mode
choice of units
l/100 km - mpg - km/l
°Celsius/°Fahrenheit
* The parameters vary according to vehicle.
CHOICE OF LANGUAGE
BLUETOOTH TELEPHONE
MANAGE THE TELEPHONE CALL
Terminate the current call
Activate private mode
BLUETOOTH CONFIGURATION
Connect/Disconnect a device
Telephone function
Audio Streaming function
Consult the paired device
Delete a paired device
Perform a Bluetooth search
CALL
Calls list
Directory
SCREEN MENU MAP
TRIP COMPUTER
Pressing the MENU button displays:
monochrome C
ALERT LOG
Diagnostics
STATUS OF THE FUNCTIONS *
Functions activated or deactivated
260
There is a difference in
sound quality between
the different audio
sources (radio, CD...).
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass,
Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to
the sources listened to. It is advisable to set
the AUDIO functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear
Balance, Left-Right Balance) to the middle
position, select the musical ambience "None"
and set the loudness correction to the "Active"
position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position
in radio mode.
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble,
Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which
may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).
The CD is ejected
automatically or is not
played by the player.
- Check that the CD is inserted in the player
the right way up.
- Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
- The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable CDs
will not be played by the audio system.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any audio
data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not
recognised by the audio equipment.
The message "USB
peripheral error" is
displayed on the screen.
Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
The Bluetooth connection is cut.
The battery of the peripheral may not be suffi ciently charged.
The USB memory stick is not recognised.
The memory stick may be corrupt.
Reformat the memory stick.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
The CD player sound
is poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in
suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting
an ambience.
261
The traffi c announcement
(TA) is displayed. I do
not receive any traffi c
information.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffi c
information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffi c information network.
QUESTION
SOLUTION
ANSWER
The quality of reception
of the radio station
listened to gradually
deteriorates or the
stored stations do
not function (no
sound, 87.5 Mhz is
displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or
there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle
is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...)
block reception, including in RDS mode.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going
through a car wash or into an underground car park).
Activate the RDS function to enable the system
to check whether there is a more powerful
transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not
indicate a failure of the audio equipment.
Have the aerial checked by a CITROËN dealer.
Sound cut-outs of
1 to 2 seconds in radio
mode.
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for any frequency
permitting better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon
is too frequent and always on the same route.
With the engine off,
the audio equipment
switches off after a
few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the audio equipment operating time
depends on the battery charge.
The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode
and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
charge.
The stored stations do
not function (no sound,
87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
An incorrect waveband is selected.
Press the BAND AST button to return to the
waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which
the stations are stored.
The message "the audio
system is overheated"
appears on the display.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to
allow the system to cool.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too
high, the audio equipment switches to an automatic thermal protection
mode leading to a reduction of the volume or stopping of the playing of
the CD.
… 280 …


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules
1

Forum

citroen-c4---2010

  • The front wiper is not working all the other parts with the switch box is working Submitted on 17-5-2022 at 21:17

    Reply Report abuse


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Citroen C4 - 2010 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Citroen C4 - 2010 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 13,29 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Citroen C4 - 2010

Citroen C4 - 2010 User Manual - German - 284 pages

Citroen C4 - 2010 User Manual - Dutch - 283 pages

Citroen C4 - 2010 User Manual - French - 264 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info